JP7038410B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and can be particularly applied to a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

The gaming machine is provided with a payout device (payout means) for paying out game balls as rental balls or prize balls. The payout device is generally configured to be able to pay out a game ball by driving a payout motor, a solenoid, or the like (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2001-347018

In a gaming machine equipped with the above-mentioned payout device, for example, when a special game advantageous to the player is started due to the occurrence of a big hit or the like, a gaming ball to a predetermined entrance such as a big winning opening during the special game. A large number of prize balls will be paid out based on the entry of the ball. In this case, the payout device continuously performs the payout operation, but the continuous payout operation puts a load on the payout device, and there is a risk that the payout device may break down due to heat generated by the payout motor or the like. In this regard, in the technique described in Patent Document 1, the drive of the payout motor is temporarily stopped for each payout of the game ball to suppress the heat generation (temperature rise) of the payout motor. If the payout motor is repeatedly stopped and started every time it is paid out, the drive control of the payout motor becomes complicated.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to raise the temperature of an electric drive source while avoiding complicated drive control of an electric drive source such as a payout motor. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the problem.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the present invention has adopted the following configuration.
That is, the gaming machine of means 1 is
It is a gaming machine equipped with a payout means for paying out a game ball by driving a payout motor .
A supply means for supplying a drive current to the payout motor ,
A control means for controlling the payout motor is provided.
The control means is
Based on the establishment of the payout operation start condition, the first drive control for starting the drive of the payout motor with the payout motor energized and
It is possible to execute a second drive control in which the current value of the drive current supplied to the payout motor is reduced to continue driving the payout motor at a predetermined time during the drive of the payout motor.
In the first drive control, at the start of the payout operation, the rotation of the rotary shaft is started after a non-rotational energization period in which the rotary shaft of the payout motor is not rotated while the payout motor is in the energized state.
The gist is that.

In the gaming machine of means 1, after the payout motor is turned on and the payout motor is started to be driven based on the establishment of the payout operation start condition, the drive is supplied to the payout motor at a predetermined time during the drive of the payout motor. Since the current value of the current is reduced to continue driving the payout motor , it is possible to suppress the temperature rise of the payout motor without temporarily stopping the drive of the payout motor. Further, at the start of the payout operation, the rotation of the rotary shaft is started after a non-rotational energization period in which the rotary shaft of the payout motor is not rotated while the payout motor is energized . It is possible to stably start the drive (payout operation) of the motor. As a result, it is possible to suppress the temperature rise of the payout motor while avoiding the complicated drive control, and it is possible to smoothly start the payout of the game ball .

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine of means 1 described above.
After the execution of the second drive control, the control means increases the current value of the drive current based on the establishment of the end condition of the payout operation, and keeps the payout motor in the energized state of the rotary shaft. It is possible to execute the third drive control to stop the rotation,
In the third drive control, the payout motor is energized for a period longer than the non-rotational energization period.
The gist is that.

In the gaming machine of the means 2, after the execution of the second drive control , based on the establishment of the end condition (stop condition) of the payout operation, the current value of the drive current is increased and the payout motor is kept energized while the rotary shaft is energized. In the third drive control, the payout motor is energized for a period longer than the non-rotational energization period, so that the payout operation can be reliably stopped . It will be possible. This enables accurate payout of the game ball .

According to the above invention, it is possible to suppress the temperature rise of the payout motor while avoiding the complicated drive control of the payout motor , and to smoothly start the payout of the game ball. Is possible .

It is a front view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a back view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the Example of this invention. It is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, and is the figure which shows the display which the gaming machine includes. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the gaming machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between the type of winning and the opening pattern of the big winning opening. It is a table which shows various random numbers acquired by a game control microcomputer. (A) is a hit determination table, (B) is a big hit type determination table, (C) is a normal symbol hit determination table, and (D) is a normal symbol variation pattern selection table. It is a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the start ball entry processing. It is a flowchart of a normal figure operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol hit / miss determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift process. It is a flowchart of a process during a normal symbol change. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of ordinary electric accessory processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure operation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart of a hit / fail determination process. It is a flowchart of the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart of a random number shift process. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart of a hit / fail determination process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart of a random number shift process. It is a flowchart of the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game). It is a flowchart of a specific area sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing. It is a flowchart of a power-off monitoring process. It is a flowchart of a sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of a receive interrupt process. It is a flowchart of 2ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a drive limitation process. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing. It is a flowchart of the variation effect end processing. It is a flowchart of a drive data output process. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an initial state of the frame movable decorative member, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an operating state of the frame movable decorative member. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement composition of the image display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of the display screen which performs the variation effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of the display screen which performs the variation effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the layer structure of a production image. (A) is a front view showing the configuration of the game board according to the other aspect 2, and (b) is a front view showing the structure of the game board according to the other aspect 3. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of a payout device. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of a payout device and a gutter member. It is a flowchart of a payout control main process. It is a flowchart of a receive interrupt process. It is a flowchart of 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a payout device control process. It is a flowchart of the payout number setting process. (A) is a flowchart of the payout motor energization start process, and (b) is a flowchart of the payout motor rotation start process. It is a flowchart of the process during rotation of a payout motor. It is a flowchart of the process during rotation of a payout motor. It is a flowchart of the payout motor energization stop processing. It is a flowchart of a payout-related control process. It is a flowchart of a command analysis process. It is a timing chart of payout motor control. (A) is a timing chart of the payout operation, and (b) is a timing chart when an error occurs during the payout operation.

Next, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to examples. In the following embodiment, the game medium used for the game is a game ball, and the pachinko game machine (ball game machine) capable of advancing the game by firing the game ball toward the game board surface is used as a book. The one to which the invention is applied will be described. Specifically, the variation display of the special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port, and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed at the end of the variation display of the special symbol, a predetermined amount is displayed to the player. A so-called “type 1” pachinko gaming machine that enables a big hit game (special game) to which a game profit (for example, a prize ball) can be given will be described as an example.

In the following description, the front side (front) is simply the front side (the side where the player is located during the game) when the gaming machine is viewed from the front, and the rear side (rear) is simply the game. This is the back side (back side) when the machine is viewed from the front. In addition, the upper side (upper side), lower side (lower side), left side (left side), and right side (right side) are the upper, lower, left, and right directions when the gaming machine is viewed from the front. For example, it refers to the upper side, the lower side, the left side, and the right side in FIGS. 1 and 3.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 mounted in the gaming machine frame 50, and the gaming board 2 is a gaming machine. It is detachably configured from the frame 50. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the gaming board 2 is removed from the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 for attaching a gaming board 2 and the like, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the island equipment in the hall. The front frame 51, the main body frame 52, and the outer frame 53 are pivotally supported on one side end side and are configured to be openable and closable, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front frame 51 stores and stores a launch handle 60 for launching a game ball with a firing intensity according to a player's operation amount (rotation angle), and a game ball used for the game. A hitting ball supply plate (hereinafter also referred to as "upper plate") 61 capable of supplying game balls to the launcher side and a surplus ball tray (hereinafter also referred to as "lower plate") 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the upper plate 61. Is provided. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 2, on the back surface side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the back surface of the main body frame 52), a ball tank 150 capable of storing game balls supplied from the island equipment (not shown) of the hall is provided. A gutter member 151 having a ball passage through which a game ball from the ball tank 150 can flow down, and a payout device 120 (payout device) capable of paying out a game ball flowing down the ball passage of the gutter member 151 as a prize ball or a rental ball. Means) and. The game ball paid out by the payout device 120 is discharged to the upper plate 61 through a game ball passage (not shown), and when the upper plate 61 is full, it is discharged to the lower plate 62.

Above the upper plate 61 in the front frame 51, a viewing window 51a is provided so that the surface (game board surface) of the game board 2 can be visually recognized from the outside with the front frame 51 closed. The viewing window 51a is composed of a transparent glass plate, and the player can pass through the viewing window 51a (glass plate) to form a later-described game area 3 formed on the surface of the game board 2 or the back side of the game board 2. You can see the display contents of the image display devices 71 and 72 arranged in.

Further, on the front frame 51, a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (collectively referred to as these two effect buttons) that can be operated by the player during execution of a game effect executed as the game progresses. (Simply referred to as "directing button 63"), a decorative frame lamp 66 that can emit various lights according to the situation of the game, and various sounds (sound effects) depending on the situation of the game. A pair of left and right speakers 67 and the like that can be used are also provided. The frame lamp 66 and the speaker 67 are a kind of electric components for effect that are driven by receiving electric power supplied from the power supply board 109 described later. Further, on the upper surface of the upper plate 61 of the front frame 51, a game ball can be rented within the range of the value balance (valuable balance) recorded on the recording medium (for example, a card or coin) accepted by the CR unit. A CR operation unit (not shown) that is operated for returning the recording medium is provided. The CR operation unit has a ball lending button for instructing the lending of game balls (that is, paying out the lending ball), a return button for instructing the return of the recording medium, and the value balance (valuable) recorded on the recording medium. A balance display unit (frequency display LED) for displaying the balance) is provided. The CR unit of this embodiment is configured as a card unit 135 in which a usable recording medium is a prepaid card.

The frame lamp 66 is composed of full-color LEDs, and an LED substrate (illumination substrate) on which the LEDs are mounted is provided on the front frame 51. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1, inside the left side (left side of the viewing window 51a) of the front frame 51, a left frame LED substrate 66L having a length extending above and below the front frame 51 is provided, and the right side of the front frame 51 (the right side of the front frame 51). Inside the (right side) of the viewing window 51a, a right frame LED substrate 66R having a length extending above and below the viewing window 51a is provided. The left and right front sides of the front frame 51 facing the LEDs mounted on these LED boards are resin lens covers that can transmit the light emitted by the LEDs (have translucency), and this lens. The light from the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) is diffused by the cover portion.

Here, in this embodiment, the left and right lens cover portions of the front frame 51 are each divided into four areas, and the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) emits light (left frame LED board 66L and right frame LED) in each area unit. It is possible to control the drive of the board 66R). That is, as shown in FIG. 1, the lens cover portion on the left side of the front frame 51 is designated as the left first region L1, the left second region L2, the left third region L3, and the left fourth region L4 in order from the top. The lens cover portion on the right side of the frame 51 is designated as a right first region R1, a right second region R2, a right third region R3, and a right fourth region R4 in order from the top. It is possible to control the light emission mode (lighting, blinking, extinguishing, color, light amount (brightness), etc.) of the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) for each of these areas, thereby emitting light in each area. It is possible to make the mode different, or to make the light emitting mode of each region the same. The effect of driving (lighting) the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) is also referred to as "frame light emission effect".

The effect button 63 functions as an input means capable of input by a player, and is a kind of electric component for effect driven by receiving electric power supplied from a power supply board 109 described later. As the effect button 63, a first effect button 63a provided on the top surface of the center of the upper plate and a second effect button 63b provided on the lower left side of the front frame 51 toward the front side are provided, and types of game effects are provided. You can use the effect buttons properly according to the situation. For example, if the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b is operated during the execution of the game effect, a predetermined operation-corresponding effect is performed based on the operation. The configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the embodiment of the present embodiment, and any input means that allows the player to input the effect, for example, an input means in which the player directly contacts the button portion to input the effect button 63. For example, it may be a haunting type, a touch sensor type, etc.), or it may be a non-contact type input means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects that a part of the player's body is in close proximity and inputs. good. Further, even if the effect button receives power supplied from the power supply board 109 described later and performs an effect operation such as protruding upward or toward the front side (movable effect operation means). good.

Further, between the left and right speakers 67, which is the upper part of the front frame 51, the frame movable decorative member 13 (a frame movable decorative member 13) which is a kind of electric component for directing driven by receiving the electric power supplied from the power supply board 109 described later. A frame-side movable effect device) is provided. The frame movable decorative member 13 of the present embodiment is mainly not shown as a box-shaped accommodating portion 13a having an open upper surface and an effect movable body 13b (see FIG. 49B) accommodated in the accommodating portion 13a. It is composed of an electric drive source such as a stepping motor. In the initial state before the frame movable decorative member 13 is driven, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 49 (a), the effect movable body 13b is accommodated in the accommodating portion 13a and is not exposed (appearing) to the outside. It is invisible (non-operating state, initial state). When the frame movable decorative member 13 is driven (operated) based on the establishment of the effect start condition by the frame movable decorative member 13 in the state (initial state) in which the effect movable body 13b is housed in the accommodating portion 13a, FIG. As shown in b), the effect movable body 13b rises from the initial position (accommodation position) to a predetermined operating position and protrudes upward from the inside of the accommodating portion 13a so that it can be visually recognized from the outside (operating state). .. Further, the effect movable body 13b is provided with an emblem accessory 13s that imitates a star shape, and the emblem accessory 13s performs an effect operation such as light emission and rotation in a state where the effect movable body 13b protrudes (appears). It is something that can be done. By driving the frame movable decorative member 13 in this way, the effect movable body 13b appears, and the player raises the expectation for hitting.

On the other hand, when the effect movable body 13b is moved (ascended) to the operation position (operation state) and the frame movable decoration member 13 is driven (operated) based on the establishment of the end condition of the effect by the frame movable decorative member 13, the effect is produced. The movable body 13b moves (descends) to the initial position (origin) and is accommodated in the accommodating portion 13a as shown in FIG. 49 (a). The mechanical structure (configuration) of the frame movable decorative member 13 that realizes the infestation motion (vertical movement) of the effect movable body 13b is not directly related to the gist of the present invention, and thus a detailed description thereof will be omitted. It can be configured by using known mechanisms and members such as rack and pinion, lead screw, and damper. Further, in this embodiment, the time required for the effect movable body 13b to move (reach) from the initial position to the operation position (appearance operation time) by driving the frame movable decorative member 13 and the effect position movable body 13b are in the operation position. The time required to move (reach) from to the initial position (return operation time) is set to 5500 ms (5.5 seconds), respectively. In this way, the frame movable decorative member 13 (effect movable body 13b) performs a relatively slow operation (appearance operation, return operation) due to the effect of the frame movable decorative member 13 (effect movable body 13b) and the effect. This is due to consideration of the influence of vibration when driven.

Here, as shown in FIG. 49 (a), a state (initial state) in which the effect movable body 13b is housed in the accommodating portion 13a before the frame movable decorative member 13 is driven (before operation). Also referred to as "state", as shown in FIG. 49 (b), a state (operating state) in which the effect movable body 13b protrudes (appears) upward from the accommodating portion 13 after the frame movable decorative member 13 is driven. Also called "second state". Further, the effect of driving (operating) the frame movable decorative member 13 (effect movable body 13b) is also referred to as "frame movable effect". Further, as a driving mode for driving the frame movable decorative member 13, a driving mode for lowering (moving) the effect movable body 13b in the operating state (second state) from the operating position to the initial position is referred to as "first driving". It is also referred to as a "mode", and a drive mode in which the effect movable body 13b in the initial state (first state) is raised (moved) from the initial position (accommodation position) to the operating position is also referred to as a "second drive mode".

The game board 2 is mainly composed of a transparent plate made of a transparent synthetic resin such as acrylic or polycarbonate. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a transparent plate is attached to a rectangular base member made of resin. As shown in FIG. 3, a substantially arc-shaped guide piece 4 for guiding the game ball launched by the operation of the launch handle 60 is provided on the surface (board surface) of the game board 2 (transparent plate). The guide piece 4 is made of a rib-shaped projecting piece provided on the surface of the game board 2, a metal rail member, or the like, and mainly includes an outer guide piece 4a (outer rail) provided on the outer peripheral side. It is composed of an inner guide piece 4b (inner rail) provided inside the outer guide piece 4a at intervals allowing the passage of a game ball. The game board 2 is also referred to as a "transparent game board".

Of the board surface of the game board 2, the area inside the guide piece 4 (outside guide piece 4a) is the game area 3 in which the game ball can flow down. A game nail (not shown) that guides the game ball in a predetermined direction while changing the movement of the game ball, and a game ball that moves (flows down) in the area pass or enter the game area 3. There will be gates, entrances, etc. that can be used. The gate, entrance, etc. will be described later. Of the game areas 3, the area on the left side of the substantially center of the board surface is defined as the left game area 3L, and the area on the right side of the substantially center of the board surface is defined as the right game area 3R. Further, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip (upper end) of the inner guide piece 4b located on the left game area 3L side, and the game ball launched by the operation of the launch handle 60 holds the ball return prevention piece 6. By crossing, the game ball can enter the game area 3 (left game area 3L). The ball return prevention piece 6 prevents the game ball once guided to the game area 3 (entering the game area 3) from returning to the launching device side.

An opening 2H is provided at substantially the center of the board surface of the game board 2, and a center decorative body 10 is attached to the opening edge of the opening 2H. The center decorative body 10 (opening 2H) has most of the display screen 71a (display area) of the lower image display device 71 provided on the back side of the game board 2, and the upper image display also provided on the back side of the game board 2. A part (downward from the center of the screen) of the display screen 72a (display area) of the device 72 is surrounded by a substantially arc shape. The display contents of the lower image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the upper image display device 72 (display screen 72a) can be visually recognized through the inside of the center decoration body 10 (that is, the opening 2H). As described above, since the game board 2 is configured as a transparent game board, the display content of the upper image display device 72 (display screen 72a) is particularly the inside of the center decorative body 10 (opening 2H). It is possible to visually recognize (perspective) not only through the upper portion) but also through the game area 3 around it.

Further, on the back side of the game board 2 (game area 3), a plurality of decorative board lamps 5 (see FIG. 5) capable of emitting various lights according to the game situation are provided. The decoration (light emission) by the board lamp 5 can be visually recognized through the game area 3 (transparent game board). Like the frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5 is also composed of full-color LEDs, and is a kind of electric component for directing driven by receiving electric power supplied from the power supply board 109 described later. The effect of driving (lighting) the board lamp 5 (board LED) is also referred to as "board light emitting effect".

In this embodiment, the upper image display device 72 is arranged side by side above the lower image display device 71, but the upper portion (the portion of about 1/3 above) of the display screen 72a of the upper image display device 72 is a game. It is in a state of protruding from the upper end of the transparent game board constituting the board 2. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower end of the upper image display device 72 is located on the upper front side of the lower image display device 71 (the upper part of the display screen 71a), and the upper end of the upper image display device 72 is a game. The image display devices 71 and 72 are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 so that the upper part of the display screen 72a protrudes upward from the upper end (upper side) of the game board 2 (transparent plate) while tilting toward the front side (front side) of the machine. It is assembled on the side. For assembling (mounting) the image display devices 71 and 72, for example, in a state where the image display devices 71 and 72 are held by a display device holding member (base member) (not shown), the holding member is screwed to the back surface of the game board 2. It is done by fixing with a stopper or the like. As a result, the image display devices 71 and 72 and the game board 2 can be integrated. However, the assembling mode of the image display devices 71 and 72 is not limited to this, and various methods such as assembling one or both of the image display devices 71 and 72 on the main body frame 52 side holding the game board 2 are various. It is possible to take an aspect. Further, the angle formed by the display screen 71a of the lower image display device 71 and the display screen 72a of the upper image display device 72 is the field of view (visibility) of the player seated in front of the game machine and the arrangement space of the image display device. It is preferable that the temperature is within the range of 135 degrees to 175 degrees in consideration of the above.

Then, on the upper portion of the game board 2 on the surface side, a transparent portion that covers the portion outside (above) the outside guide piece 4a, including the protruding portion (protruding portion) of the upper image display device 72 (display screen 72a). A cover 2K is attached (see FIGS. 3 and 50). Therefore, the display content of the upper image display device 72 (display screen 72a) is the inside of the center decoration body 10 (that is, the opening 2H), the game area 3 around the center decoration body 10, and the outside of the game area 3 (from the outside guide piece 4a). It is possible to see through the cover 2K that covers the outside).

The lower image display device 71 and the upper image display device 72 are each composed of a liquid crystal display, and are a kind of electric components for directing driving by receiving electric power supplied from a power supply board 109 described later. Regarding the display screen size (size of the display area) of both display devices, the lower image display device 71 is larger than the upper image display device 72 (in other words, the upper image display device 72 is larger than the lower image display device 71). Is also small). On the display screens of these two image display devices, various effects are developed according to the situation of the game. As a representative of the effect, the variable display of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (also simply referred to as "effect symbol 8") is displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which will be described later. There is a production pattern game production (also called "variable production") to be performed. The display content of the display screen shown in FIG. 3 shows an outline when a variable effect is performed.

The variable display of the effect symbol 8 in this embodiment is performed using the display screen 71a of the lower image display device 71 and the display screen 72a of the upper image display device 72, straddling both display screens 71a and 72a. A production symbol display area (also referred to as an “effect display unit”) is provided. Further, both display screens 71a and 72a are also provided with a background display area in which a background image constituting a screen background (background of variable effect) is displayed. This background display area can also be regarded as an "effect display unit".

Here, the lower image display device 71 is also referred to as a "first display means" or "first image display means", and the upper image display device 72 is referred to as a "second display means" or "second image display means". Also called. Further, the lower image display device 71 and the upper image display device 72 are collectively referred to as an "image display device", and the image display device is also referred to as a "display means" or an "image display means". Further, the display screen 71a is also referred to as a "first display screen", the display screen 72a is also referred to as a "second display screen", and the display screens 71a and 72a are also collectively referred to as a "display screen".

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is scrolled (up and down) from the upper part of the display screen 72a toward the lower part of the display screen 71a. It is supposed to be. When the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is completed, the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed on the display screen 71a as shown in FIGS. 3 and 51 (b). In principle, the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) is performed using both the display screen 71a of the lower image display device 71 and the display screen 72a of the upper image display device 72, as shown in FIGS. 51 and 52. However, depending on the mode of the variable effect (variable effect pattern), an auxiliary effect display of the effect display performed on the display screen 71a (for example, display of characters, characters, etc. indicating the type of reach effect or effect mode being executed) may be displayed. It may be performed on the display screen 72b. That is, the lower image display device 71 having a large display screen size may be used as the main display device, and the upper image display device 72 having a small display screen size may be used as the sub display device.

In addition to the vertical direction, there is a mode of scrolling display of the effect symbol 8 in, for example, a left-right direction or an oblique direction. The effect symbol display area 7b is composed of, for example, three symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". The left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, and the middle effect is displayed in the middle symbol display area. The symbol 8C is displayed, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the symbol display area on the right. It is not necessary to separately provide the positions of the left, middle, and right symbol display areas, and the left, middle, and right effect symbol display areas may be used as the entire symbol display area (effect symbol display area 7b). ..

The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of this embodiment are each composed of a plurality of symbols (identification information) representing numbers from "1" to "9". Depending on the combination of left, middle, and right effect symbols (stop display mode) that are stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b, they are displayed on the first special symbol display 41a (also referred to as "first special symbol display unit") described later. The display result of the variation display of the first special symbol and the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as "second special symbol display unit"), that is, The result of the special symbol winning / failing determination (also simply referred to as “winning / failing determination”) is displayed so that the player can easily recognize it. In this embodiment, the stop order of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that are variablely displayed is, in principle, "left → right → middle". For this reason, the left effect symbol 8L is also referred to as "first stop symbol", the right effect symbol 8R is also referred to as "second stop symbol", and the middle effect symbol 8C is referred to as "final stop symbol" or "final stop symbol". Also called "third stop symbol". In addition, either the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be simply referred to as "design" or "identification information". Furthermore, the normal symbol is "general symbol", the special symbol is "special symbol", the first special symbol is "special diagram 1" and "first special symbol", and the second special symbol is "special diagram 2" and "second special symbol". ".

For example, when the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination is a 15R jackpot, it is possible to stop and display the effect symbol with the same doublet such as "777". In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a 2R big hit or a small hit, a preset chance eye such as "135" or a special outcome using a special symbol (dedicated symbol) such as "3 ★ 3" is used. It is possible to stop and display the effect symbol with. Further, when the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination is incorrect, at least one of the three symbols such as "637" and "373" can be stopped and displayed with different different patterns. .. As a result, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by looking at the stopped display of the effect symbol. That is, in general, the player does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b. See and grasp the effect symbol displayed in the symbol display area 7b.

Here, among the stop display modes of the effect symbols, the stop display modes corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit may be referred to as a "big hit mode", a "specific mode", a "specific display result", or the like. There are cases where the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / miss determination is off is referred to as "off mode", "non-specific mode", "non-specific display result", or the like. In addition, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination is a small hit may be referred to as a "small hit mode", a "predetermined mode", a "predetermined display result", or the like.

In the lower center (lower area) of the display screen 71a of the lower image display device 71, a first effect hold 9a (also referred to as a "first special figure hold image") is provided according to the number of stored first special figure hold described later. The first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) for displaying the image, and the second effect hold 9b (also referred to as “second special figure hold image”” according to the number of storages of the second special figure hold described later. ) Is provided as a second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display unit). Depending on the display mode (number of displays) of the first effect hold and the second effect hold, the number of stored first special figure hold and the second display on the first special figure hold indicator 43a (see FIG. 4), which will be described later. The number of stored second special figure hold displayed on the special figure hold indicator 43b can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The first effect hold 9a and the second effect hold 9b are also collectively referred to as "effect hold" or "special figure hold image".

In the upper left portion (upper left display area) of the display screen 72a of the upper image display device 72, three small effect symbols 8l, 8c, 8r (simply also referred to as "small effect symbols 8a") in which the numbers of the effect symbols 8 are reduced are displayed. A small effect symbol display area 8b (small effect symbol display unit) to be displayed is provided. The small effect symbol 8a starts the variation display when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 starts, and ends the variation display (stop display) when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 ends (stop display) (FIG. 51). See). As shown in FIG. 52, even if two of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and the remaining one is variablely displayed due to the execution of the reach effect or the like, the three small effect symbols 8l are displayed. , 8c, 8r all continue to be variable display. That is, the small effect symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are variablely displayed in synchronization with the special symbol while the special symbol is variablely displayed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the variable display of the small effect symbol 8 is such that each small effect symbol is rotated and displayed in the left-right direction (horizontal direction) in the small effect symbol display area 8b. Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 51 (b), the stop display mode of the small effect symbol 8a is doublet or doublet of three-digit numbers, as in the stop display mode of the effect symbol 8. It is based on the result of the special symbol hit / miss judgment.

Further, in the upper right portion (upper right display area) of the display screen 72a of the upper image display device 72, a variation number display area 77 (number display area) for displaying the number image 77a indicating the variation display number of the special symbol is provided. On the right side of the image, there are a special figure 1 fourth symbol 78a that displays variable display and stop display in synchronization with the first special symbol, and a special figure 2 fourth symbol that displays variable display and stop display in synchronization with the second special symbol. A fourth symbol display area 78 for displaying 78b is provided. The number of times image 77a displayed in the variation number display area 77 shows the number of executions (variation display number) of the variation display of the special symbol performed until the big hit occurs in the low base state described later, and the special symbol is displayed. It is displayed by adding 1 for each fluctuation display of. That is, in the high base state, the number image 77a (variation display number) is not displayed in the fluctuation number display area 77. The number image 77a of this embodiment represents the number of variable display times by an arithmetic numeral (Arabic numeral), and can display up to 4 digits (thousands digit).

The special figure 1 fourth symbol 78a displayed in the fourth symbol display area 78 performs variable display and stop display in accordance with the variable display and stop display of the first special symbol. Specifically, the variation display of the fourth symbol 78a of the special figure 1 is performed in the mode of blinking display, and the stop display is performed in the mode of lighting display. This lighting display (stop display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol 78a) is a color (for example, off "blue", small) according to the result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination (display result of the variation display of the first special symbol). Hit "green", big hit "red", etc.). Similarly, the special figure 2 fourth symbol 78b performs the variable display and the stop display in accordance with the variable display and the stop display of the second special symbol. Specifically, the variation display of the fourth symbol 78b of the special figure 2 is performed in the mode of blinking display, and the stop display is performed in the mode of lighting display. This lighting display (stop display of the 4th symbol 78a of the special figure 2) is a color (for example, off "blue", big hit) according to the result of the 2nd special symbol hit / miss judgment (display result of the variation display of the 2nd special symbol). It is done in "red" etc.).

In this way, displaying the fourth symbol and the small effect symbol 8a covers almost the entire area of the effect symbol display area 7b (effect display unit) when performing reach effect, development effect, etc. as part of the effect symbol game effect. Various effect images such as character images and effect images are displayed, and the board movable decorative member 14 described later operates to cover the effect symbol display area 7b (effect display unit) to cover a special symbol (effect). This is because it may be difficult to grasp whether or not the symbol) is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the special figure 1 fourth symbol 78a and the special figure 2 fourth symbol 78b are also collectively referred to as a "fourth symbol". Further, an image showing information related to the progress of the game, such as an effect hold (special figure hold image), a fourth symbol, and a small effect symbol 8a displayed on the image display device, is also referred to as an "information image". Further, any or all of the effect symbol 8, the small effect symbol 8a, and the fourth symbol may be simply referred to as "design", "effect symbol", or "identification information".

Further, on the display screens of the image display devices 71 and 72, in addition to displaying the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) using the effect symbols as described above, the hit game effect and the customer executed in association with the hit game. The waiting demo production etc. are displayed. Further, in the effect pattern game effect, the hit game effect, and the demo effect, in addition to the effect symbols such as numbers, various effect images other than the effect symbols such as the background image and the character image are displayed.

In the vicinity of the center of the game board 2 (game area 3), as described above, the center decoration body 10 surrounds most of the display screen 71a and a part of the display screen 72a (the part below the center of the screen). It is provided. At the lower part of the center decorative body 10, a stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which the game ball can roll is provided. Further, a hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left portion of the center decoration body 10. The warp portion 12 is provided with a warp inlet and a warp outlet, and receives a game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp inlet, discharges the game ball from the warp outlet, and guides the game ball to the stage portion 11. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage portion 11 has a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage portion 11, and can enter the first starting port 20 described later.

Further, on the lower back side of the center decorative body 10, the left back side, and the right back side, there are three board movable decorative members 14L, 14C, and 14R (generally referred to as "board movable decorative member 14") that can be operated according to the game effect. ) Is provided respectively. The panel movable decorative members 14L, 14C, and 14R are configured to include an electric drive source such as a stepping motor (not shown), respectively, and are driven by receiving electric power supplied from a power supply board 109 described later. It is a kind of electrical parts. In FIG. 3, the board movable decorative member 14 (board side movable effect device) is not operating (initial state), and only a part of the board movable decorative member 14 is visible. By operating (driving) along with the execution of a highly probable game effect, one, two, or three of the movable board decorative members 14L, 14C, and 14R appear in front of the display screen 71a to display the front surface. It becomes a covered state (operating state), and most of it becomes visible. The board movable decorative member 14L is hidden on the left side of the screen in the initial state, and moves diagonally upward to the right toward the center of the screen to be in an operating state appearing on the front side of the screen. Further, the board movable decorative member 14C is hidden in the lower side of the screen in the initial state, and by moving upward toward the center of the screen, the operating state appears on the front side of the screen. Further, the board movable decorative member 14R is hidden on the right side of the screen in the initial state, and moves diagonally upward to the left toward the center of the screen to be in an operating state appearing on the front side of the screen. By driving (moving) the board movable decorative member 14 in this way, the player raises the expectation for hitting. The effect of driving (moving) the board movable decorative member 14 is also referred to as "board movable effect", and the above-mentioned "frame movable effect" and "board movable effect" are also collectively referred to as "movable effect".

Here, the image display devices (image display devices 71, 72) capable of performing a display effect by displaying various effect images according to the game situation are also referred to as "display effect means". Further, the frame movable decorative member 13 and the board movable decorative member 14 that can perform a movable effect by operating along with the game effect are also referred to as "frame movable effect means" and "board movable effect means", respectively. Further, the frame movable effect means and the board movable effect means are also collectively referred to as "movable effect means". In addition to the movable decorative member, for example, when the effect button 63 moves up and down or vibrates with the game effect, the effect button 63 can also be said to be a "movable effect means". In addition, the speaker 67 that can produce sound by emitting various sounds (sound effects) according to the situation of the game is also called "sound production means", and emits various lights according to the situation of the game. The board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 (light emitting member) capable of producing light emission by emitting light are also referred to as "light effect means". In addition to the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66, for example, the effect button 63 and the firing handle 60 have built-in light emitting members (other lamps) such as LEDs, and the action of the light emitting members can be adjusted according to the situation of the game. When performing light emission effects such as lighting and blinking, these effect buttons 63 and the firing handle 60 can also be said to be "light effect means". Further, these "display effect means", "frame movable effect means", "board movable effect means", "sound effect means" and "light effect means" are also collectively referred to as "effect means".

A non-variable first starting port 20 is provided below the center of the game area 3 (below the lower image display device 71) so that the ease of entering the game ball (the size of the game ball receiving port) does not change. A winning device 19 (also referred to as a “non-variable starting port”) is provided. Random numbers for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct are acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, and when a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct (first special symbol is correct or not). Judgment) is executed, and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / fail judgment.

Below the first starting port 20, a variable winning device 22 (“variable starting port”) is provided with a variable second starting port 21 that changes the ease of entering the game ball (the size of the game ball receiving port). Also called) is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination of whether or not the second special symbol is correct (the second special symbol is correct or not). ) Is executed, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / fail judgment.

The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23, and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. By this opening / closing operation, the second starting port 21 can be changed from the first aspect (closed state) to the second aspect (open state) in which the possibility of entering the game ball is higher than that of the first aspect. be. That is, the movable member 23 changes the possibility of the game ball entering the second starting port 21 by performing a predetermined operation (opening / closing operation). The movable member 23 is driven by a second starting port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5). In the present embodiment, the second starting port 21 is capable of entering the game ball only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and is unable to enter the game ball when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. .. The second starting port 21 is completely closed when the movable member 23 is closed, as long as it is more difficult for the game ball to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It does not have to be something that makes it impossible to enter the ball.

On the right side of the first starting port 20 (right game area 3R) in the game area 3, a first large winning device 31 provided with a first large winning opening 30 (also referred to as a “first variable ball entry opening”) is provided. Has been done. The first prize-winning device 31 includes an opening / closing member 32, and opens and closes the first prize-winning opening 30 by the operation of the opening / closing member 32. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5). The first large winning opening 30 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, the first large winning device 31 is in a state where the game ball cannot enter (closed state) and a state in which the game ball can enter (open state) due to the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 32. Can be changed to.

Further, in the upper right corner (right game area 3R) of the first large winning opening 30 in the game area 3, the second large winning device 36 provided with the second large winning opening 35 (also referred to as “second variable entry opening”). Is provided. The second special winning device 36 includes an opening / closing member (blade member) 37 that can rotate in the left-right direction (horizontal direction), and opens and closes the second special winning opening 35 by the operation of the opening / closing member 37. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5). The second large winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state. That is, the second big winning device 36 is in a state where the game ball cannot enter (closed state) and a state in which the game ball can enter (open state) due to the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 37. Can be changed to.

The second special winning device 36 is formed with a specific area 39 through which a game ball that has entered the second big winning opening 35 can pass. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the high probability state described later is generated based on the detection that at least one of the gaming balls that have entered the second major winning opening 35 has passed through the specific area 39. .. That is, the specific area 39 is a probabilistic operation port. Such a specific area 39 is not provided in the first large winning device 31. The second special winning opening 35 (second big winning device 36) provided with the specific area 39 (V area) as such a probabilistic operating port is also referred to as a “V attacker”. The high probability state is one of the game benefits given to the player separately from the special game.

Further, a gate 28 (game ball passage opening) through which a game ball can pass is provided directly above the first large winning opening 30 (right game area 3R) in the game area 3. Based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28, a random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is opened. The normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner as the symbol hit / fail judgment is executed, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the normal symbol hit / miss judgment. When the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the second starting port 21 is opened. Further, a plurality of general winning openings 27 are provided in the lower part of the game area 3. In this embodiment, four general winning openings 27 are provided, three of which are left general winning openings provided on the left side of the first starting opening 20 (left game area 3L), and one is the first. It is a right general winning opening provided on the right side of the large winning opening 30 (right game area 3R). The first starting opening 20, the second starting opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, the second big winning opening 35, and the general winning opening 27 are the entry openings that trigger the payout of the prize balls, and each entry is made. When a game ball enters the mouth, a predetermined number of game balls (prize balls) are paid out at each entrance. Specifically, the number of prize balls in the first starting port 20 is "4", the number of prize balls in the second starting port 21 is "2", and the number of prize balls in the first large winning opening 20 and the second large winning opening 35. Is "15", and the number of prize balls in the general winning opening 27 is "10".

A game in which a plurality of entrances (first starting opening 20, second starting opening 21, first large winning opening 30, second large winning opening 35, general winning opening 27, gate 28) and the like are arranged in this way. The area 3 can be divided into a left game area 3L (first area) on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 3R (second area) on the right side. Launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3L is called "left-handed", and launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3R is called "right-handed". .. Here, among the plurality of entry openings, the first start opening 20 and the three left general winning openings 27 are provided so that the game ball flowing down the left game area 3L of the game area 3 can enter. In the second starting opening 21, the first large winning opening 30, the second large winning opening 35, the right general winning opening 27, and the gate 28, a game ball flowing down the right game area 3R of the game area 3 enters. It is provided so that it is possible. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game is started, in principle, the ball is aimed at entering the first starting port 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, when the game condition changes due to a hit in the hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the first starting opening 20, in principle, the gate 28, the second starting opening 21, the first big winning opening 30 and the first winning opening 20 are hit right. The aim is to enter the two major winning openings 35.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged at the lower right of the game board 2. The main display 40 includes a first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit) that displays and stops the first special symbol, and a second special symbol that displays and stops the second special symbol. A display 41b (second special symbol display unit) and a normal symbol display 42 (ordinary symbol display unit) for variable display and stop display of normal symbols are included. Further, the main display 40 includes a first special symbol hold display 43a for displaying the number of stored numbers of the hit / fail determination information (first special symbol hold) related to the first special symbol, and the hit / fail determination information related to the second special symbol (first special symbol hold). The second special figure hold indicator 43b that displays the stored number of the second special figure hold) and the normal figure hold indicator 44 that displays the stored number of the operation hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42 are include. Further, the main display 40 has a hit indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment is a hit, and the first special symbol hit / miss judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment. A round display 45 indicating the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed when the result of the hit is a hit, a game state display 46 indicating that the probability fluctuation function is activated, and the launch direction of the game ball, that is, right-handed. The launch direction indicator 47, which indicates whether the player should perform a left-handed strike or a left-handed strike, is included. These various indicators included in the main indicator 40 are displayed and controlled by a main control unit described later.

The variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as "special symbol". Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b may be collectively referred to as "special symbol display unit 41". Further, the first special figure holding display 43a and the second special drawing holding display 43b may be collectively referred to as "special figure holding display unit 43".

In the special symbol display unit 41, the special symbol (identification information) is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time, then stopped and displayed, and the ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 by the stopped displayed special symbol (stop symbol). The result of the lottery based on (special symbol winning / failing judgment, big hit lottery) is notified. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct. When the stop symbol is a predetermined specific special symbol (specific identification information), that is, the mode of the stop display of the special symbol (display result of the variable display of the special symbol) is the hit mode of the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, or the like. In this case, a special game (big hit game, small hit game) is performed in which the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the hit symbol displayed as stopped. The opening pattern of the large winning openings (first large winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

The stop display of the special symbol is performed until a predetermined stop display time (fixed display time) has elapsed. Then, when the special symbol displayed as stopped is a deviated symbol (disengaged mode, non-specific mode) and the special symbol hold is stored at the time of the stop display, when the stop display time elapses, the storage order is reached. The oldest (earliest) special symbol hold is exhausted, which initiates the variable display of the next special symbol. In addition, if the special symbol displayed as stopped is an off symbol and the special symbol hold is not stored at the time of the stop display, the stop display state of the special symbol is maintained even after the stop display time has elapsed. Will be done. On the other hand, when the special symbol displayed as stopped is a hit symbol (big hit symbol or small hit symbol), when the stop display time elapses, the game shifts to the opening period described later, and one round of the big hit game after the opening period. The first opening of the eye or small hit game is started. The stop display time of the special symbol is generally set to "0.5 seconds to 1.0 seconds", and is set to "0.6 seconds" in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "ip", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination. In this embodiment, as a result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination, four types of jackpots, "15R first jackpot", "15R second jackpot", "5R third jackpot" and "2R fourth jackpot", and the first A small hit is provided (see FIGS. 6 and 8), and the LED of the first special symbol display 41a can adopt a display mode corresponding to each of the large hit and the small hit. For example, when the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination is the first big hit (15R big hit), the three LEDs of "ijn" are turned on and the rest are turned off (15R first big hit symbol). When the second big hit (15R big hit) is reached, the three LEDs of "ijk" are turned on and the rest are turned off (15R second big hit symbol). When the third big hit (15R big hit) is reached, the three LEDs of "ijl" are turned on and the rest are turned off (15R third big hit symbol). In addition, when the 4th big hit (2R big hit) is reached, the 4 LEDs of "jnop" are turned on and the rest are turned off (2R 4th big hit symbol). In addition, when the first small hit is reached, the four LEDs of "mnop" are turned on and the rest are turned off (small hit symbol). In addition, when it comes off, the two LEDs of "lo" are turned on and the rest are turned off (off symbol).

On the other hand, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination. In this embodiment, two types of jackpots, "15R 5th jackpot" and "15R 6th jackpot", are provided as a result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination (see FIG. 8), and the second special symbol display. The LED of the device 41b can take a display mode according to each of the big hits. For example, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is the fifth big hit (15R big hit), the three LEDs of "abd" are turned on and the rest are turned off (15R fifth big hit symbol). When the 6th big hit (15R big hit) is reached, the 3 LEDs of "abc" are turned on and the rest are turned off (15R 6th big hit symbol). In addition, when the second small hit is reached, the four LEDs of "cdeh" are turned on and the rest are turned off (second small hit symbol). In addition, when it comes off, the two LEDs of "eh" are turned on and the rest are turned off (off symbol).

The stop display mode (stop symbol) of the special symbol is not limited to these, and can be arbitrarily set. Further, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the mode of the variation display is, for example, the light repeatedly flows from left to right in a predetermined order. Each LED can be turned on as described above.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, various information such as a random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is correct (“acquired information”” is obtained based on the entry. (Also referred to as) is acquired, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure holding storage unit (not shown) formed in the RAM of the main control unit. Specifically, if the ball enters the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special figure holding storage unit (not shown) as the first special figure holding (first acquisition information), and goes to the second starting port 21. If the ball is entered, it is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit (not shown) as the second special figure hold (second acquisition information). The number of special figure reservations (acquired information) that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit is limited to a predetermined number, and the upper limit thereof in this embodiment is "4". The first special figure holding storage unit and the second special figure holding storage unit are also referred to as "first acquired information storage means" and "second acquired information storage means", respectively, and are also generally referred to as "acquired information storage means".

The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit is digested when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the special symbol hold means to determine a random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not corresponding to the special symbol hold, and to execute a variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 or the second starting opening 21 cannot be immediately executed at the time of the entry, that is, the variation of the special symbol. Even when the display is being executed or the special game is being executed, it is possible to reserve the right to determine whether or not the special symbol is correct for the ball, up to a predetermined number.

The number of special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit is displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure holding display 43a is composed of two LEDs of "uv", and the first special drawing is controlled by displaying and controlling the LEDs according to the number of the first special drawing holding. It displays the number of holds. For example, when the number of holds is "0", both LEDs are turned off, such as "u □ v □" (for example, □: off, ●: red, ▲: green), and the number of holds. When is "1", the display mode is such that the "u" LED is turned off and the "v" LED is turned on in red, such as "u □ v ●". The display mode is such that the "u" LED is turned on in red and the "v" LED is turned off, such as "v □", and when the number of holds is "3", both LEDs are turned on, such as "u ● v ●". The display mode can be set to light up in red, and when the number of holds is "4 (upper limit number)", both LEDs can be turned on in green as in "u ▲ v ▲".

Further, the second special figure hold indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs of "wx", and the number of the second special figure hold is obtained by controlling the display according to the number of the second special figure hold. Is to display. For example, when the number of holds is "0", both LEDs are turned off, such as "w □ x □" (for example, □: off, ●: red, ▲: green), and the number of holds is set. “1” to “4” are also defined in the same manner as in the first special figure holding indicator 43a.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28. In the normal symbol display 42, after displaying the normal symbol variable for a predetermined time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the normal symbol hit / fail determination result based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is determined by the stopped display normal symbol (stop symbol). Notify. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the judgment of whether or not the normal symbol is correct. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (hit normal symbol), an auxiliary game is performed in which the second starting port 21 is opened with an opening pattern according to the current gaming state. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs of "st", and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol hit / miss judgment depending on the lighting mode thereof. Is. For example, when the determination result is a hit, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed when both LEDs are lit, such as "s ■ t ■" (for example, ■: lit, □: turned off). If the determination result is out of order, an out-of-order normal symbol in which only the LED of "t" is lit, such as "s □ t ■", is displayed. It should be noted that the off-normal symbol is not a specific ordinary symbol. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined fluctuation time, and the mode of the fluctuation display is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on and off. be.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, various information (also referred to as “acquired information”) such as a random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol is correct is acquired based on the passage, and various acquired information is acquired. Is temporarily stored as a pachinko machine hold in a pachinko machine hold storage unit (not shown) formed in the RAM of the main control unit. The number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure reservation storage unit is limited to a predetermined number, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is "4". The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage unit is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine a random number for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not corresponding to the normal symbol hold, and to execute a variable display of the normal symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be executed immediately at the time of passage, that is, when the variation display of the normal symbol is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed. Even so, it is possible to reserve the right to determine whether or not a normal symbol is correct for the passage of a predetermined number up to a predetermined number.

The number of the normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage unit is displayed on the normal figure hold display 44. Specifically, the normal figure hold display 44 is composed of two LEDs of "qr", and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs according to the number of normal figure hold. be. For example, when the number of holds is "0", both LEDs are turned off, such as "q □ r □" (for example, □: off, ●: red, ▲: green), and the number of holds is set. When is "1", the display mode can be such that the LED of "q" is turned off and the LED of "r" is turned on in red, such as "q □ r ●". Further, the holding numbers "2" to "4" are also defined in the same manner as in the first special figure holding display 43a.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a main control board 80 (also referred to as a “main control unit”, which is a “game control unit”) that controls game progress and game profits such as a special symbol hit / miss judgment, a normal symbol hit / fail judgment, and a transition of a game state. (Also referred to as "unit"), sub-control board 90 (also referred to as "sub-control unit" or "effect control unit") that controls the effect to be executed as the game progresses, and payout control that controls the payout of the game ball. It includes a board 110 (also referred to as a “payout control unit”), an image control board 100 (image control unit) that controls the display of the image display devices 71 and 72, and the like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case for storing the main control board 80 is provided in a substantially central portion on the back surface side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and voice control is performed above the main control board case. An image control board storage case containing the board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100 is provided, and a sub control board storage case containing the sub control board 90 is provided on the image control board storage case. ing. Further, a payout control board case for accommodating the payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power supply board case for accommodating the power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof. The power supply board 109 receives power supplied from the outside and supplies power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, various boards, devices, and devices shown in the block diagram of FIG. It supplies electric power to various electric parts required for the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as sensors, switches, motors, and solenoids. The power supply board 109 is also referred to as a "power supply means".

A game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “game control microcomputer”) 81 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main control board 80. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data (information) to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 87 (I / O port unit). The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. Further, the ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-mentioned special figure holding storage unit (first special figure holding storage unit and second special figure holding storage unit) and the normal figure holding storage unit. Further, a storage area for use for various flags and various counting counters is secured at a predetermined address of the RAM (main control RAM) of the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81).

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and a signal is output to each solenoid from the main control board 80. Specifically, the sensors include a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, a specific area sensor 39a, and non-specific. The area sensor 49a and the general winning opening sensor 27a are connected. These various sensors are also referred to as "game ball detecting means".

The first start port sensor 20a is provided in the first start port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided in the second starting port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided in the first large winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided in the second large winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 35. The specific area sensor 39a is provided in the specific area 39 in the second large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 39. The non-specific area sensor 49a is provided in a non-specific area (not shown) in the second large winning opening 35, and is a game that has passed through the non-specific area among the game balls that have entered the second large winning opening 35. It detects a ball (that is, a game ball that has not passed through the specific area 39). The general winning opening sensor 27a is provided in each general winning opening 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 27.

Further, as the solenoids, the second starting port solenoid 24, the first special winning opening solenoid 33, and the second special winning opening solenoid 38 are connected. The second starting port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22. The first prize-winning port solenoid 33 is for driving the opening / closing member 32 of the first prize-winning device 31. The second prize-winning port solenoid 38 is for driving the opening / closing member 37 of the second prize-winning device 36.

Further, on the main control board 80, a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol holding display 43a, a second special symbol holding display 43b, and a normal drawing are used. A hold indicator 44, a round indicator 45, a game status indicator 46, a launch direction indicator 47, and a hit indicator 48 are connected. That is, the display control of these main indicators 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81.

Further, the main control board 80 mainly transmits commands related to payout of prize balls (prize ball payout command, etc.) to the payout control board 110, and various commands related to monitoring payout from the payout control board 110 (payout abnormality detection commands, etc.). ) Is received. That is, the main control board 80 and the payout control board 110 are connected so as to be capable of bidirectional communication. The payout control board 110 is stored in a payout device 120 for paying out prize balls and rental balls, a card unit 135 (installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and inserted in a prepaid card (game value storage medium), and the like. (A device that enables ball lending based on the information provided) is connected, and the launch device 112 is connected via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a “launch control unit”). The launcher 112 includes a launch handle 60 (see FIG. 1). When the handle 60 of the launcher 112 is operated by the player, the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the launch handle 60, and the launch volume 115 detects the amount of rotation of the launch handle 60. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115. In this embodiment, the number of game balls that the launcher 112 can continuously launch by driving the launch motor 113 is about 100 in one minute.

The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as a “payout control microcomputer”) that controls payout of game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling payout of game balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 of the payout device 120 is based on a signal from the main control board 80 (prize ball payout command) and a signal from the card unit 135 via the input / output circuit 117 (I / O port unit). The payout motor 121 (electrical drive source) is driven to pay out prize balls and rental balls. The game ball to be paid out is detected by the payout sensor 122 (detection means) for the counting. The input / output circuit 117 may be built in the payout control microcomputer 116, and the ROM may be externally attached. Further, the lower plate full sensor 62a and the ball out sensor 152 are connected to the payout control board 110 (see FIG. 5). The lower plate full sensor 62a detects that a large amount of game balls are stored in the lower plate 62 and the lower plate 62 is in a full state, and is a game ball passage connecting the payout device 120 and the lower plate 62 (the lower plate full sensor 62a). (Not shown) is provided near the lower plate 62 side. The ball-out sensor 152 detects that the game balls supplied to the payout device 120 are in a shortage state (hereinafter, also referred to as “ball-out state”), and is provided on the gutter member 151. ..

Here, the outline of the payout device 120 and the gutter member 151 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. The payout device 120 (payout means) is mainly configured by accommodating a payout motor 121 (electrical drive source) in a device case 125 and covering it with a cover member 124 (see FIG. 2). 55 and 56 show the inside of the payout device 120 (device case 125) from which the cover member 124 has been removed. A payout motor 121 is housed in a predetermined accommodating portion in the device case 125, and a screw 123 for ball feeding is attached to a rotation shaft (drive shaft) of the payout motor 121. Further, in the device case 125, a ball passage 126 in which a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball or a rental ball can flow down, and a reception port 127 for receiving a game ball from a gutter member 151 into the ball passage 126 are paid out. A discharge port 128 for discharging the game ball to the outside of the payout device (outside the device case) is integrally formed over the upper and lower sides, and a payout sensor 122 is provided in the vicinity of the discharge port 128. The payout motor 121 is composed of a stepping motor, and the drive control of the payout motor 121 is performed under the control of the payout control unit via a drive circuit (driver circuit for a stepping motor) (not shown). When the payout motor 121 is stopped, a part of the screw 123 protrudes toward the ball passage 126, so that the game ball cannot flow down in the ball passage 126. On the other hand, when the payout motor 121 rotates, the screw 123 attached to the rotation shaft also rotates, and along with this, the game ball in the ball passage 126 is sent downward and discharged from the discharge port 128. The discharged (paid out) game ball is detected by the payout sensor 122 and is paid out to the upper plate 61 or the lower plate 62. Further, with the payout (discharge) of the game ball by the payout device 120, the game ball flows down inside the gutter member 151. On the other hand, the gutter member 151 is configured by covering the gutter main body 151A in which the ball passage 153 is formed with the gutter cover 151B (see FIG. 2). FIG. 56 shows the inside of the gutter member 151 (gutter main body 151A) from which the gutter cover 151B has been removed. In the gutter main body 151A, a ball passage 153 for guiding the game ball supplied from the ball tank 150 to the payout device 120 side is integrally formed in the vertical direction. The upstream opening of the ball passage 153 is an inflow port into which a game ball supplied from the ball tank 150 (see FIG. 2) flows in, and the downstream opening is connected to the receiving port 127 of the payout device 120. ing. A ball break sensor 152 and a detection piece 154 are provided in a substantially intermediate portion in the vertical direction of the ball passage 153, and detect when the game ball in the ball passage 153 is insufficient and the game ball does not exist in the intermediate portion. The piece 154 tilts toward the ball passage 153 and deviates from the detection range (detection area) of the ball break sensor 152, whereby the ball break state is detected.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control board 90 is mounted with an effect control one-chip microcomputer 91 (“effect control microcomputer”) that controls the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the effect as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. .. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 95 (I / O port unit). The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. Further, the ROM may be externally attached. Further, a storage area for use for various flags and various counting counters is secured at a predetermined address of the RAM (effect control RAM) of the sub-control board 90 (effect control microcomputer 91).

An image control board 100, a voice control board 106, and a lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90. The sub control board 90 (sub control unit), the image control board 100 (image control unit), the voice control board 106 (sound control unit), and the lamp control board 107 (lamp control unit) are displayed according to the game situation. It functions as an effect executing means for causing various effects such as an effect, a sound effect, and a lamp effect (light effect) to be executed by a corresponding effect device, member, or the like (electrical parts, effect means). In addition, various advance notice effects (suggestion effects) that suggest information regarding variable display of identification information (special symbols and effect symbols) are executed by the corresponding effect devices, members, etc. (electrical parts, effect means). It also functions as an execution means.

Here, the advance notice effect is, for example, the display result of the variable display or the display result such as the possibility that the display result of the variable display becomes a big hit (reliability, expectation) and whether or not the reach effect is executed (feasibility). It is a production (suggestion production) that suggests information about the process leading up to the derivation display of. The notice effect is roughly divided into a notice effect related to the hold based on the preliminary judgment result of the hold of the special symbol and a notice effect related to the variable display (variation effect) being executed. The former is also called "hold look-ahead notice". The latter is also referred to as "the change notice". In this embodiment, it is possible to execute both of these notice effects.

Based on the command received from the main control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 is attached to the CPU of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100 as a lower image. The display control of the display device 71 and the upper image display device 72 is performed. The RAM of the image control board 100 (image control microcomputer 101) is a memory for expanding image data. In the ROM of the image control board 100 (image control microcomputer 101), still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display devices 71 and 72, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. ( Image data such as (including production symbols, reserved symbols, etc.) and background images are stored. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, display control is executed based on the read image data. A VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided in place of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. A CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may be made to execute voice control. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, or the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the image control microcomputer 101 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the light emission pattern data (lighting / extinguishing, light emitting color, etc.) of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 based on the command received from the main control board 80. , Also referred to as lamp data) is determined from the data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the frame movable decorative member 13 and the board movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. As described above, the frame movable decorative member 13 is provided on the front frame 51, and the board movable decorative member 14 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the center decorative body 10. The frame movable decorative member 13 is also referred to as a "frame movable accessory", and the board movable decorative member 14 is also referred to as a "board movable accessory", and the frame movable decorative member 13 (frame movable accessory) and the board movable. The decorative member 14 (movable board) is also generally referred to as a "movable decorative member" or a "movable accessory".

The effect control microcomputer 91 drives (operates) the movable decorative member (frame movable decorative member 13, board movable decorative member 14) in a predetermined drive mode (operation mode) (also referred to as “drive data”). ) Is determined from the data stored in the ROM of the sub control board 90, and the drive control of the movable decorative member is performed via the lamp control board 107 and the relay board 108. A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in this case, the CPU may execute lamp lighting control (LED drive control) or drive control of a movable decorative member. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and the data related to the light emission pattern and the drive pattern may be stored in the ROM.

Further, the sub-control board 90 has a first effect button detection switch 63c and a first effect button detection switch 63c for detecting that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) has been operated (pushed, rotated, pulled, etc.). 2 The effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output from the corresponding effect button detection switch to the sub control board 90. The first effect button detection switch 63c and the second effect button detection switch 63d are collectively referred to simply as "effect button detection switch".

Here, the sub-control board 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control) functions as a "drive control means" for driving and controlling electric components for effect such as movable decorative members 13 and 14, board lamps 5, and frame lamps 66. It is a thing. Further, the image control board 100 (image control microcomputer 101) functions as a "drive control means" for driving and controlling the image display devices 71 and 72 (a type of electric component for effect).

Next, the control (determination means) related to the hit / fail determination in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. As a result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment, there are "big hit", "small hit", and "missing". When the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination is "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41, and when it is "small hit", the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. , When "off", the "off symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. If it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit, a "special game" is executed in which the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is opened in the opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol displayed as stopped. .. A special game that is executed as a big hit is called a "big hit game", and a special game that is executed as a small hit is called a "small hit game".

There are multiple types of hits. As shown in FIG. 6, the types of jackpots include "15R (round) 1st jackpot", "15R 2nd jackpot", "15R 3rd jackpot", "2R 4th jackpot", "15R 5th jackpot" and There is a "15R 6th jackpot". In "15R 1st big hit" and "15R 5th big hit", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is 15 times, and it is the first round. In the second round, it is a big hit that opens the second big winning opening 35 in such a manner that the game ball can pass (pass V) to the specific area 39 (easily). The round aiming at the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 is also called a "V round" or a "chance round".

In "15R 2nd big hit", "15R 3rd big hit" and "15R 6th big hit", the number of opening times (number of rounds) of the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is 15 times. However, the opening time of the first and second rounds, which is the above-mentioned V round, is extremely short (opening and closing for a moment), and it is difficult (may be impossible) for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39. Is. That is, it can be said that these big hits are big hits that do not open the second big winning opening 35 in such a manner that the game ball can pass through the specific area 39 (easily).

In "2R 4th big hit", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is 2 times, and the 1st and 2nd rounds which are V rounds. It is a big hit that opens the second big winning opening 35 in such a manner that the game ball can pass through the specific area 39. However, since the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 is 1.8 seconds even if the first round and the second round are combined, it is less likely that the game ball will pass through the specific area than the 15R first big hit. It has become.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on the passage of the gaming ball to the specific area 39 during the jackpot game, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is shifted to the high probability state described later. Therefore, when the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination is the 15R 1st jackpot or the 15R 5th jackpot, the V in the first and second rounds is such that the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area 39 is extremely high. Since the round is executed, the game state after the big hit game can be shifted to the high probability state by passing the game ball to the specific area 39 during the execution of the big hit game. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is the 2R 4th big hit, one round in such a manner that the game ball may pass through the specific area 39, although it is not as much as the 15R 1st big hit or the 15R 5th big hit. Since the second and second rounds of V are executed, if the game ball can be passed to the specific area 39 during the execution of the jackpot game, the gaming state after the jackpot game can be shifted to the high probability state. ..

On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol winning / failing judgment is 15R 2nd big hit, 15R 3rd big hit or 15R 6th big hit, the opening time of the 1st round and the 2nd round V round is 0. Since it is 1 second, it is very difficult to put the game ball into the second big winning opening, so the probability that the game ball will pass through the specific area 39 during the execution of the big hit game is extremely low ( It becomes practically impossible), and the gaming state after the big hit game is very likely to be the normal state (low probability state) described later (it can be said that the low probability state is reached).

On the other hand, the small hit (first small hit, second small hit) is a hit that opens the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) in the same opening pattern as the 2R fourth big hit. That is, in the small hit, the second large winning opening 35 is opened in such a manner that the game ball can pass through the specific area 39. However, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the execution of the small hit game, the game state after the execution of the small hit game does not change from that before the execution of the small hit game. Therefore, if the gaming state before the execution of the small hit game is the normal state (low probability state), the gaming state after the execution of the small hit game is also the normal state. From the player's point of view, the above 2R 4th big hit and small hit cannot be distinguished from each other even by looking at the opening pattern of the big winning opening (2nd big winning opening 35). That is, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination is "2R 4th big hit" or "small hit". Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the special game as the 2R 4th big hit (during the big hit game), it is not possible to recognize whether or not the subsequent game state has shifted to the high probability state. Have difficulty. Further, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the special game as a small hit (during the small hit game), whether the subsequent game state remains in the normal state or shifts to the high probability state is determined by that alone. It's difficult to recognize. As a result, in the case of a small hit or a 2R 4th big hit, it is possible to proceed with the game with the expectation that it may be in a high probability state, and it is possible to enhance the game interest. .. In the case of small hits, the number of times the big winning opening is opened is not called the number of rounds, but simply the number of times it is opened.

FIG. 6 shows the opening pattern of the large winning opening when each of the big hits and small hits is made in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment. That is, when the 15R first jackpot is reached (when the 15R first jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a) and when the 15R fifth jackpot is reached (15R on the second special symbol display 41b). When the 5th big hit symbol is stopped and displayed), the 2nd big winning opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds in 1R to 2R, and the 1st big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds in 3R to 15R. In this area, since the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 in the 1st R and the 2nd R is 28 seconds each, there is an extremely high possibility that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the round (during the V round). It has become.

In addition, when the 15R second jackpot is reached (when the 15R second jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a) and when the 15R third jackpot is reached (on the first special symbol display 41a). When the 15R 3rd jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) and when the 15R 6th jackpot is displayed (when the 15R 6th jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the 2nd special symbol display 41b), 1R to 2R The second big winning opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds, and the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds in 3R to 15R. In this area, the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 in the 1st and 2nd rounds is extremely short, with a maximum of 0.1 seconds each (opening and closing for a moment), so the game is played during that round (during the V round). It is almost impossible for the sphere to pass through the specific area 39.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first round and the second round (V round) are compared with the opening pattern for the 15R second, third and sixth big hits and the opening pattern for the 15R first and fifth big hits. The opening mode is different between. In the 15R 1st and 5th big hits, the 2nd big winning opening 35 opens for 28 seconds in the 1st and 2nd rounds, so that in the V round, no ball clogging or troubles in the game ball launch system occur. As long as it is almost certain, the game ball will enter the second large winning opening 35 and pass through the specific area 39 with a high probability. On the other hand, in the 15R 2nd, 3rd and 6th big hits, the 2nd big winning opening 35 opens only 0.1 seconds in the 1st and 2nd rounds. Therefore, it is very difficult for the game ball to enter the second large winning opening 35. Therefore, the possibility that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the execution of the jackpot game related to the 15R second, third, and sixth jackpots is considerably lower than that of the 15R first and fifth jackpots. It can be said that it is virtually impossible to pass.

It should be noted that a jackpot in which a V round is executed in a mode in which the possibility of passing a game ball to a specific area 39 (V passage possibility) is extremely high is also referred to as a "V passing planned jackpot", and the V passing possibility is extremely low. The jackpot in which the V round is executed in the embodiment is also referred to as "V non-passing scheduled jackpot".

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, when the 2R 4th big hit is reached (when the 2R 4th big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the 1st special symbol display 41a), the 2nd big winning opening is from 1R to 2R. Open 35 for up to 0.9 seconds. In this case, the total opening time of the 2nd big winning opening 35 on the 1st and 2nd rounds is 1.8 seconds at the maximum, so the game ball is put into the 2nd big winning opening 35 during the round. It is possible to pass through the specific area 39. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, one gaming ball is launched in about 0.6 seconds, so if the opening time of the second major winning opening 35 is 1.8 seconds. , It is fully possible to insert a game ball into the second large winning opening 35 and aim for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39. However, since the total opening time of the 2nd big prize opening is as short as 1.8 seconds in the 2R 4th big hit, it is not possible to expect as many prize balls (game profit) as other 15R big hits. That is, it is a big hit that can hardly get a prize ball compared to other big hits.

In addition, when it becomes the first small hit (when the first small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a) and when it becomes the second small hit (when it becomes the second small hit (the second special symbol display 41b). When the second small hit symbol is stopped and displayed), the second large winning opening 35 is opened twice for a maximum of 0.9 seconds. That is, the big winning opening is opened with the same opening pattern as the 2R 4th big hit. Even in this small hit, since the opening time of the second large winning opening 35 is 1.8 seconds in total, it is possible to allow the game ball to enter the second large winning opening 35 and pass through the specific area 39. There is. However, as described above, even if the small hit game passes through the specific area 39, the game state does not change before and after the small hit game. Further, in the small hit game, since the total opening time of the big winning opening is as short as 1.8 seconds, it is not possible to expect as many prize balls as in the 2R 4th big hit. That is, the small hit has almost no privilege for the player (only the prize ball by entering the ball) in terms of the transition of the game state and the point of the prize ball.

In this embodiment, as the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 35, the first opening pattern in which the game ball can pass through the specific area 39 (easy to pass) and the game ball (15 first big hit, 15R 5th big hit). The second opening pattern (15R second big hit, 15R third big hit, 15R sixth big hit), which makes it difficult to pass through the specific area 39 (15R second big hit, 15R sixth big hit), and the first opening where the game ball can pass through the specific area. It is possible to have a third open pattern and (2R fourth jackpot), which are less likely to pass than the pattern. Further, as an opening pattern for small hits, a fourth opening pattern is provided in which a game ball can pass through a specific area 39 but does not give a privilege (does not generate a high probability state) even if the game ball passes through the specific area 39. can do. As another aspect, the fourth opening pattern may be an opening pattern that cannot pass through the specific region 39.

The probability of distribution to each jackpot in the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 40% for the 15R first jackpot, 20% for the 15R second jackpot, 30% for the 15R third jackpot, and 2R first. The 4 jackpots are 10% (see the random number column for determining the jackpot type in FIG. 6). On the other hand, the jackpot in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 80% for the 15R 5th jackpot and 20% for the 15R 6th jackpot (random numbers for determining the jackpot type in FIG. 6). See column). It can be said that this distribution probability represents the possibility that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the big hit game, that is, the probability of becoming a high probability state, and the high base state in which the open extension function described later is activated. It can be said that it represents the probability of becoming.

That is, regarding the probability of becoming a high probability state, if a big hit is made in the hit / fail judgment (first special symbol hit / fail judgment) based on the entry into the first starting port 20, the probability is at least 40%. Including the case where the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the big hit game related to the 2R 4th big hit, the probability is 50%. On the other hand, when the hit / fail judgment (second special symbol hit / fail judgment) based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is a big hit, the probability is 80%.

Regarding the probability of becoming a high base state, if the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit in the gaming state (low base state) in which the open extension function is not activated, the probability is 60%. Including the 2R 4th big hit when the 1st special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit in the high base state, the probability is 70%. On the other hand, if the second special symbol is a big hit in the hit / fail judgment, the probability is 100%. Then, when the second special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit, the 2R big hit that may occur when the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit does not occur, and the 15R big hit is always made.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, rather than being a big hit in the first special symbol winning / failing determination (big hit lottery of the first special symbol) performed by the game ball entering the first starting port 20. A big hit in the second special symbol hit / fail judgment (big hit lottery of the second special symbol) performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 21 is compared with a case where a big hit is made in the first special symbol hit / fail judgment. , The probability of becoming a high probability state, the probability of becoming a high base state, and the possibility of winning a prize ball for 15R are high. That is, the case where the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit is set to be more likely to be advantageous to the player than the case where the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit. 2 It is highly possible that the variable display of the special symbol works more favorably for the player than the variable display of the first special symbol. Therefore, the player will play the game in anticipation of entering the second starting port 21. This is particularly remarkable during the operation of the open extension function (high base state) in which the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 increases. The above-mentioned distribution probability is an example, and can be arbitrarily set in consideration of playability, specifications, and the like.

Further, in this embodiment, since the second special symbol is superior to the first special symbol, the case where both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed, that is, , When both the 1st special symbol hold and the 2nd special figure hold are "1" or more, the variable display of the 2nd special symbol (digestion of the 2nd special symbol hold) is changed to the variable display of the 1st special symbol (1st). 1) Priority is given to the digestion of the special figure reservation). As a result, in the high base state in which the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 increases, the frequency of execution of the variation display of the second special symbol increases, so that it can be said that the game can be advanced advantageously for the player. Nevertheless, the fact that the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the high base state means that the player will be overwhelmed by the game in the advantageous state (high base state). Since the variable display of the 1 special symbol may work more disadvantageously than the variable display of the 2nd special symbol, it can be said that the variable display of the 1st special symbol in the high base state is not desirable for the player.

Here, as the mode of the stop display of the special symbol, the big hit symbol is also referred to as "specific mode" or "specific display result", and the small hit symbol is also referred to as "predetermined mode" or "predetermined display result". The design is also referred to as "non-specific mode" or "non-specific display result". Further, the jackpot symbol (15R 3rd jackpot symbol, 2R 4th jackpot symbol in the low base state) that does not trigger the setting of the high base state is also referred to as "first specific mode" or "first specific display result". The jackpot symbols (15R 1st, 2nd, 5th, 6th jackpot symbols, 2R 4th jackpot symbols in the high base state) that trigger the setting of the high base state are referred to as "second specific mode" and "second". Also called "specific display result". In addition, as a gaming state when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, a gaming state in which the opening extension function does not operate (low base state) is also referred to as a "first gaming state", and a gaming state in which the opening extension function operates (high base). The state) is also referred to as a "second game state".

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss is determined based on a "special symbol hit / miss judgment random number (also referred to as" hit / miss judgment information ")", and a big hit in the case of a big hit. The type is determined based on the "random number for determining the jackpot type (also referred to as" random number for determining symbol "and" information for determining symbol ")". As shown in FIG. 7A, the random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not takes a value in the range of "0 to 629", and the random number for determining the jackpot type takes a value in the range of "0 to 99". In addition, the random numbers (acquisition information) acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 include a random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not, a random number for determining the jackpot type, and a "variable pattern random number". (Also called "variation pattern information") ". The fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation time, and takes a value in the range of "0 to 198". Further, the random numbers acquired based on the passage of the gate 28 include the normal symbol hit / miss determination random numbers shown in FIG. 7 (B). The random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 (ordinary symbol lottery), and takes a value in the range of "0 to 240".

Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a plurality of gaming states by a combination in which each function of the probability variation function for a special symbol, the probability variation function for a normal symbol, the variation time shortening function, and the open extension function is activated or inactive. ing. For special symbols (1st special symbol and 2nd special symbol), the state in which the probability fluctuation function is activated is called "high probability state", and the state in which it is not activated is called "normal state (also referred to as" low probability state "). ". In the high probability state, the probability of being determined as a big hit in the special symbol winning / failing determination is higher than in the normal state. That is, in the normal state, the hit / fail judgment is made using the hit judgment table for the normal state, and in the high probability state, the value of the random number for the special symbol hit / fail judgment to be judged as a big hit is larger than that in the normal state. A hit / fail judgment is made using the judgment table (see FIG. 8A). That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the probability that the display result of the variation display of the special symbol becomes a big hit (the stop symbol becomes a jackpot symbol) becomes higher than when it is not activated.

Further, for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the fluctuation time shortening function is operating is referred to as "time saving state", and the state in which the special symbol is not operating is referred to as "non-time saving state". In the time-saving state, the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the confirmation display time) is shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the non-time-saving state. That is, in the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table defined so that the fluctuation pattern having the short fluctuation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 9). .. As a result, in the time-saving state, the digestion pace of the special figure hold becomes faster, and effective entry into the starting port (entry that can be memorized as the special figure hold) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit with the smooth progress of the game.

The probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) may be operated at the same time, or only one of them may be operated. Then, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the normal symbol operate in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening function for the special symbol. That is, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol operate in the time saving state of the special symbol, and do not operate in the non-time saving state. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the hit probability in the normal symbol winning / failing determination is higher than in the non-time-saving state. That is, the normal symbol hit / fail judgment (judgment of the normal symbol) is performed using the normal symbol hit judgment table in which the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) judged to be a hit is larger than the normal symbol hit judgment table used in the non-time saving state. (See FIG. 8 (C)). That is, when the probability fluctuation function for a normal symbol is activated, the probability that the display result of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol will be a hit (the stop symbol will be a normal hit symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated.

Also, in the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but 1 second in the time saving state (see FIG. 8D). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) is activated, and the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state. In addition, in the time saving state, the function of increasing the number of times the variable winning device 22 is opened is activated, and the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time saving state. Specifically, when the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is a hit in the non-time saving state, the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) performs an opening operation for 0.2 seconds once, and the time saving state. When the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is successful, the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) performs the opening operation for 2.0 seconds three times.

In the situation where the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the normal symbol, and the opening time extending function and the opening number increasing function of the variable winning device 22 are operating, those functions are not activated as compared with the case where these functions are not activated. Therefore, the second starting port 21 is frequently opened, and the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port 21 becomes high (also referred to as “high frequency state”). As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, becomes high. Therefore, the state in which these functions are operating is also referred to as a "high base state", and the state in which these functions are not operating is also referred to as a "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have.

The high base state (high frequency state) does not have to activate all the above functions. That is, by operating at least one of the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the normal symbol, and the opening time extending function and the opening number increasing function of the variable winning device 22, the function is not activated. However, it is sufficient that the second starting port 21 is easily opened (the frequency of ball entry is high). Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state of the special symbol. A function that generates such a high-base state can also be called a "high-base generation function".

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game in the case of the 15R first and fifth jackpots is special if the gaming ball passes through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game. The symbol is in a high-probability state and a special symbol is in a time-saving state and a high base state (see FIG. 6). This gaming state is particularly called "high accuracy and high base state". The high-accuracy high-base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) or the big hit game is executed as a big hit.

Further, in the case of the 15R second and sixth big hits, the game state after the big hit game is the normal state of the special symbol because it is extremely difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 during the big hit game. In addition to this, the special symbol is in a time-saving state and a high base state (see FIG. 6). This gaming state is particularly called a "low accuracy high base state". The low accuracy high base state is a big hit until the variation display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) or the variation display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example). The game ends when the special game (big hit game) related to the big hit is executed. Although the possibility is extremely low, if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the big hit game related to the 15R 2nd and 6th big hits, the game state after the big hit game is "highly accurate". It becomes "high base state". Further, although the possibility is extremely low, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39 during the big hit game related to the 15R 1st and 5th big hits, the gaming state after the big hit game is completed is ". "Low accuracy and high base state".

In addition, the game state after the end of the big hit game in the case of the 15R third big hit is a normal state of the special symbol because the possibility that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the big hit game is extremely low. In addition, the special symbol is in a non-time saving state and a low base state (see FIG. 6). This gaming state is particularly called a "low probability low base state". The low probability low base state is a basic gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, an initial gaming state. Although the possibility is extremely low, if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the big hit game related to the 15R third big hit, the game state after the big hit game is described as "high accuracy" described later. It becomes "low base state".

Further, in the low probability low base state, the game state after the end of the big hit game in the case of the 2R 4th big hit has a high probability of a special symbol if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the big hit game. It becomes a state and a non-time saving state and a low base state of a special symbol (see FIG. 6). This gaming state is particularly called "high accuracy and low base state". The high-accuracy-low-base state ends when a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) of special symbol variation display is executed, or when a big hit is performed and a big hit game is executed.

This high-probability low-base state is a state in which the high-probability state is latent, that is, the high-probability state is difficult for the player to recognize. That is, the high probability low base state is a so-called "latent probability change state (also referred to as" probability non-notification state ")". On the other hand, the above-mentioned high-accuracy high-base state is a state in which it is clear to the player that it is a high-probability state. That is, the high probability high base state is a so-called "probability change game state".

Further, in the high base state, the game state after the end of the big hit game in the case of the 2R 4th big hit is "high accuracy high base state" if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the big hit game. (See FIG. 6). That is, the time saving function and the base state of the special symbol are the same as the states before the execution of the jackpot game.

In a high base state such as a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy high base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the right game area 3R by hitting right. That is, the high base state is also a right-handed game state in which the game is advanced by right-handed. In the high base state, the second starting port 21 is easier to open than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the second starting port 21 than to enter the first starting port 20. Because it is. Therefore, in the high base state, while passing the game ball through the gate 28, which normally triggers the judgment of whether or not the symbol is correct, by hitting right to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 21, rather than hitting left. In addition, a large number of starting balls (opportunities for determining whether or not a special symbol is correct) can be obtained. In this state, the firing direction indicator 47 is controlled to be lit in a predetermined manner, and notifies that the right gaming area should be fired. In the high base state, the variation display of the second special symbol (determination of whether or not the second special symbol is correct) is mainly performed based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 21. However, even in the high base state, if the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is "0" and the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "1" or more, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. Since the game ball hits right in the high base state, the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the first special figure hold is unlikely to be newly stored. However, for example, when a big hit occurs (first hit). If the number of balls on hold in Special Figure 2 becomes "0" under the circumstances where the hold of the first special figure stored at the time) remains, the first special figure is held even in the high base state. The variable display of the first special symbol is performed by the digestion of the hold.

On the other hand, in a low base state such as a high accuracy low base state or a low accuracy low base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the left game area 3L by left-handing. That is, the low base state is also a left-handed game state in which the game is advanced by left-handed. In the low base state, the second starting port 21 is less likely to be opened than in the high base state, and it is easier to enter the first starting port 20 than to enter the second starting port 21. Because it is. Therefore, in the low base state, by hitting left to allow the game ball to enter the first starting port 20, a larger number of starting balls (opportunity for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct) can be obtained than by hitting right. Can be done. In this state, the firing direction indicator 47 is lit (display controlled) in a predetermined manner to notify the left gaming area that the firing direction should be fired. In the low base state, the variation display of the first special symbol (determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct) is mainly performed based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 20. However, even in the low base state, when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "1" or more, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed along with the priority digestion of the second special figure reservation. Since the player hits the left side in the low base state, normally, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 21, and the second special figure hold is unlikely to be newly stored. When the state shifts from the high base state (time saving state) to the low base state (normal state), if the second special figure hold stored in the high base state before the transition remains, the low base state Even in the state, the change display of the second special symbol is performed due to the priority digestion of the second special symbol hold.

The launch direction indicator 47 is composed of two LEDs of "yz", and indicates the launch direction by turning on the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify the left game area that both LEDs should be turned off as a display mode such as "y □ z □" (for example, □: off, ■: on). can. In addition, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the right game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned on, such as "y ■ z ■" (for example, □: off, ■: on). can.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on the low probability low base state in which the small hit game and the big hit game are not performed, this low probability low base state is referred to as the "normal game state" or. It can be regarded as a "normal state", and a game in which a special symbol is variablely displayed in the state can be regarded as a "normal game".

The big hit game is a game that can be executed by changing the special symbol and displaying the big hit symbol in a stopped manner. For the player, the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 32, 2nd big winning opening) Since it is an advantageous game in which a large amount of prize balls can be obtained by entering the game ball into the mouth 35), the big hit game can be regarded as a "special game", and the game state in which the big hit game is performed. Can be regarded as a "special game state".

In addition, although the small hit game is not as good as the big hit game, it is possible to obtain a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big prize opening (1st big winning opening 32, 2nd big winning opening 35). Can be said to be a game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game. Therefore, the small hit game can also be regarded as a "special game", and the game state in which the small hit game is performed can also be regarded as a "special game state". In addition, in order to distinguish between the special game as a big hit game and the special game as a small hit game, the special game as a small hit game can be regarded as a "small profit special game".

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main control unit) will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 38. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads out the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80 and executes it. .. As shown in the figure, in the main control main process, the initial settings are first performed (S101). In the initial settings, for example, stack settings, constant settings, interrupt time settings, CPU settings of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, and various flags, status, and counter resets. And so on. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

Following the initial setting (S101), interrupts are disabled (S102), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of the various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by one addition. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81).

When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, interrupts are enabled (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80, for example, in a cycle of 4 ms. Then, between the end of the interrupt process (S105) and the start of the next interrupt process (S105), the update process of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is repeated. Will be executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt process (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, interrupt processing (S105) will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, in the interrupt processing (S105), the output processing (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), commands (control signals) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) in each process described below are transmitted to the sub control board 90 and the sub control board 90. It is output to the payout control board 110 or the like. The commands and the like output here include information on the game status, the result of the special symbol winning / failing judgment, the symbol as the jackpot type, the fluctuation pattern, etc., and the information on the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls (number of prize balls). Will be. The command consists of, for example, 2 bytes of information. The upper 1 byte is information about the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information about the content of the command.

In the input processing (S202) performed after the output processing (S201), various sensors (first starting port sensor 20a, second starting port sensor 21a, first large winning opening sensor) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are used. The detection signal detected by 30a, the second large winning opening sensor 35a, the general winning opening sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5) is read, and the winning ball payout command is stored in the output buffer of the RAM. Further, when the first start port sensor 20a or the second start port sensor 21a detects a game ball, the start ball entry command corresponding to each start port is output to the RAM output buffer by the start ball entry time processing (S205) described later. Remember in.

Here, the prize ball payout command is a payout control board 110 (payout control) for paying out the game ball (prize ball) based on the entry of the game ball into various entrances provided in the game area 3 (on the game board surface). This is a command for instructing the unit), and usually one prize ball payout command is stored in the output buffer of the RAM for each detection of one game ball by various sensors such as a start opening sensor and a large winning opening sensor. The prize ball payout command of this embodiment includes a "prize ball 2 payout command" for instructing the payout of two prize balls and a "prize ball 10 payout command" for instructing the payout of 10 prize balls. There are multiple types of commands according to the number of game balls (number of prize balls) that can be paid out as balls. Specifically, 15 types of "prize ball 1 payout command" to "prize ball 15 payout command" ( There are 15) commands. Therefore, for example, when the detection signal of the first start port sensor 20a is input, the "prize ball 4 payout command" is input, and when the detection signal of the second start port sensor 21a is input, the "prize ball 4 is paid out". 2 payout command ”,“ prize ball 15 payout command ”when the detection signal of the large prize opening sensors 30a and 35a is input, and“ prize ball 10 payout ”when the detection signal of the general winning opening sensor 27a is input. Each "command" is stored in the output buffer. Also, if the detection signals for multiple sensors are input at the same time, or if there are multiple detection signal inputs for one sensor at the same time, the total number of prize balls based on those multiple inputs. The prize ball payout command according to the above is stored in the output buffer. Specifically, for example, when the detection signal of the first starting port sensor 20a (number of prize balls "4") and the detection signal of the general winning port sensor 27a (number of prize balls "10") are input at the same time. Is stored in the output buffer of the "prize ball 14 payout command", and if the detection signal (prize ball number "15") of the first large winning opening sensor 30a is input twice at the same time, two "prize" The ball 15 payout command ”is stored in the output buffer. However, when a plurality of inputs are at the same time, individual prize ball payout commands corresponding to the respective inputs may be stored in the output buffer.

The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) performed next is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update processing of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. 7 is performed after the execution period of the timer interrupt processing (S105) and the other period (after the end of the interrupt processing (S105)). It is performed both in the period until the next interrupt processing (S105) is started).

Following the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203), the start port sensor detection process (S204), start ball entry process (S205), normal symbol operation process (S206), and special symbol operation process (S207), which will be described later. , Specific area sensor detection process (S208), hold ball number process (S209), and power failure monitoring process (S210) are executed. In addition, the interrupt processing (S105) is terminated by executing "other processing" necessary for advancing the game. Then, the processes S102 to S104 of the main control main process are repeatedly executed until the interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (see FIG. 10), and when the interrupt pulse is input (after about 4 msec). ), Interrupt processing (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the command or the like set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) is output.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
As shown in FIG. 12, in the start port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). ). If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305, and if the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), the number of normal symbol reserved balls (normal symbol hold). (Specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of holdings of the normal figure provided in the RAM) is less than 4 (S302).

If the number of normal symbol reserved balls is not less than 4 (NO in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, if the number of normal symbol reserved balls is less than 4 (YES in S302), "1" is added to the number of normal symbol reserved balls (S303), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7B) of the random number counter for normal symbol hit / miss determination stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the acquired random number value (acquired information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of ordinary symbol reserved balls in the normal figure reserved storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second start port 21, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 21a (S305). If the game ball has not entered the second starting port 21 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309, and if the game ball has entered the second starting port 21 (YES in S305). , The number of special figure 2 hold balls (the number of the second special figure hold, specifically, the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of the second special figure hold provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) is less than 4 (upper limit number). It is determined whether or not it is (S306). Then, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is not less than 4 (NO in S306), the process proceeds to S309, and when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is less than 4 (YES in S306), the special figure 2 Add 1 to the number of reserved balls (S307).

Subsequently, the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) is performed. In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not, which is stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM, and the random number for determining the jackpot type. The counter value (label-TRND-AS) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (that is, the random number values shown in FIG. 7 (A) are acquired), and the acquired random number values (acquisition) are acquired. Information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the second special figure 2 in the second special figure reserved storage unit 85b.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first start port 20, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 20a (S309). If the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20 (NO in S309), the process is completed, and if the game ball has entered the first starting port 20 (YES in S309), the special figure 1 Whether or not the number of reserved balls (the number of first special figure hold, specifically, the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of first special figure hold provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) is less than 4 (upper limit number). Is determined (S310). Then, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not less than 4 (NO in S310), the process is completed, and when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is less than 4 (YES in S310), the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is reached. Add "1" to (S311).

Subsequently, the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) is performed. In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312), the value of the special symbol hit / miss determination counter stored in the updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is the same as in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308). (Label-TRND-A), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (label-TRND-AS), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (that is, the disturbance shown in FIG. 7A). (Acquire numerical values), and store those acquired random numbers in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the first special figure in the reserved storage unit of the first special figure.

[Processing at the time of starting ball entry]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a start ball entry process (S205) following a start port sensor detection process (S204). As shown in FIG. 13, in the start ball entry processing (S205), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has increased by “1” (S315). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has increased by "1" (YES in S315), the process proceeds to S316. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 in S307 in the start opening sensor detection process (S204) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second start opening. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has not increased (NO in S315), the process proceeds to S319.

In S316, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure hold storage unit is read (acquired information). S316). Next, the acquired random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, among the acquired random number values read out, the value of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not (the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not) is a big hit according to the current game state (low probability state or high probability state). It is determined whether the hit is off or off, and if the result of the determination is a big hit, the type of the big hit is further determined. This process of S317 corresponds to a preliminary determination (so-called “hold look-ahead”) performed prior to the correctness determination (S1303, S1309) in the special figure 2 correctness determination process (S1202) described later.

The pre-judgment as to whether or not it is a big hit can be made in the big hit judgment table (see FIG. 8A), that is, in the high probability state, the big hit judgment table for the high probability state, or in the normal state (low probability state). For example, it is possible to determine whether or not the value matches the jackpot determination value based on the jackpot determination table for the normal state. In addition, as another preliminary determination mode, as a variation pattern information determination table capable of determining variation pattern information, a variation pattern information determination table for a normal state (for a low probability state) and a variation pattern information determination table for a high probability state (for a high probability state). It is assumed that the fluctuation pattern information determination table of the above is provided. Then, in the preliminary determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on the acquired random number value (value of the random number counter for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct) and the variation pattern information determination table according to the game state. It is possible to do. Then, from the selected fluctuation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not the game is a big hit, the type of the big hit, and whether or not a game effect with high reliability of the big hit is executed.

Next, in S318, game information (preliminary judgment information) related to the result of the preliminary judgment by S317, specifically, information indicating whether or not the random number value for special symbol hit / fail judgment matches the jackpot judgment value (hit / miss information) and , Information indicating the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (random number value for determining the jackpot type), information indicating the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value), etc. And set the command in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). In addition, as a special figure 2 start entry command, a part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read by S316 may be transmitted to the sub control board as it is, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be transmitted as it is. Is not transmitted as it is, but the game information acquired based on the value of the random number acquired in Special Figure 2 (for example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern information and the like) may be transmitted.

Further, by analyzing the special figure 2 start-in ball command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub control unit 90, whether the information is related to a big hit, what kind of big hit is, and what is the fluctuation pattern. The sub-control unit 90 can identify the command. Further, in this embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entry command, whether or not the acquired special figure 2 acquisition random number becomes a big hit when it is determined in a high probability state, and a low probability. It is possible to specify whether or not it will be a big hit when it is judged by the state. As a result, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start entry command as hold (effect hold information), predetermines the effect hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether or not the command is successful in a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not the effect hold information determined to be a big hit is stored in.

From the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not among the random number values read by S316 is not sent to the sub-control unit as it is, and the value of the random number counter for determining the other big hit type (big hit). Command data including information indicating the value of the random number value for determining the type) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value) and the information indicating the result of the pre-judgment are generated as the special figure 2 start entry command, and this is generated. It is possible to set.

Next, in S319, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has increased by "1" in the same manner as in the process according to the above-mentioned special figure 2 (S319). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has increased by "1" (YES in S319), the process proceeds to S320. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 in S311 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start port. On the other hand, if it is determined in S319 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has not increased (NO in S319), the process ends as it is.

In S320, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S320), and when it is determined that the time saving flag is ON, that is, it is in a high base state (YES in S320), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in S320 that the time saving flag is OFF, that is, it is in a low base state (NO in S320), the process proceeds to the process related to the pre-determination after S321.

The processing of S321 to S323 is the same as that of S316 to S318 described above for the special figure 1. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure hold storage unit is read (S321). Pre-judgment is performed on the read random number value (S322). Then, the command data including the game information related to this prior determination is generated as the special figure 1 start entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). The pre-determination (holding look-ahead) of S322 is performed prior to the pass / fail determination (S1603, S1609) in the special figure 1 pass / fail determination process (S1207) described later.

Here, in the high base state, the open extension function that increases the frequency of entering the ball into the second starting port 21 is operating, and the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 (see FIG. 8B) is likely to be performed. It has become. Further, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the digestion of the special figure 2 hold (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in preference to the digestion of the special figure 1 hold (variation display of the first special symbol). There is. For this reason, in this embodiment, the preliminary determination regarding the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 preliminary judgment) is performed in the low base state in which the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly performed, and the special figure 2 hold is performed. (Special Figure 2 Preliminary Judgment) is to be performed regardless of whether it is in the low base state or the high base state. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, the game ball is controlled to a low accuracy and low base state during the big hit game, but the game ball enters the first starting port 20 during the big hit game. FIG. 1 Even if the number of reserved balls increases by "1", the processes of S321 to S323 (special figure 1 pre-determination process) are not performed.

[Usu-zu operation processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal drawing operation process (S207) shown in FIG. 14 after the start-in ball game process (S206). In the normal figure operation process (S207), the process related to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and "normal figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each stage. .. Then, when the "normal figure operation status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "2" (S401). NO, YES for S403), normal symbol change processing (S404) is performed, and if the "normal symbol operation status" is "3" (NO for both S401 and S403, YES for S405), the normal symbol is confirmed. Processing (S406) is performed, and if the "normal operation status" is "4" (all of S401, S403, and S405 are NO), ordinary electric accessory processing (S407) is performed. The operation status of the normal figure is "1" by default.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 15, in the normal symbol standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (S501), and if it is "0" (YES in S501). ), Finish this process. On the other hand, if it is not "0" (NO in S501), the normal symbol hit / miss determination process described later is performed (S502), and then the normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, referring to the normal symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8 (D), if the game state is a time-saving state, a normal symbol variation pattern having a variation time of 1 second is selected. do. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a non-time saving state, a normal symbol variation pattern with a normal symbol variation time of 30 seconds is selected. After finishing the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), the normal symbol random number shift process (S504) described later is performed, and then the normal symbol variation start process (S505) is performed to finish the process. In the normal symbol variation start process, the variation display of the normal symbol is started based on the normal symbol variation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". Further, in the normal symbol change start process, a normal symbol change start command is set in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of change of the normal symbol.

[Ordinary symbol hit / fail judgment process]
As shown in FIG. 16, in the normal symbol winning / failing determination process (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the normal symbol winning / failing random number counter stored in the normal symbol hold storage unit is read (S601). .. Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (that is, whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state) (S602). When it is determined in S602 that the time saving flag is ON, that is, it is in the time saving state (YES in S602), among the normal symbol hit judgment tables shown in FIG. 8 (C), the table for the time saving state (the hit judgment value is "". Based on the high-probability normal-figure hit / fail determination based on "0" to "239"), it is determined whether or not it is a hit (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value (label-TRND-H) of the read random number counter for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct matches any of the hit determination values. On the other hand, when it is determined in S602 that the time reduction flag is not ON, that is, it is in the non-time reduction state (NO in S602), the table for the non-time reduction state (hit) among the normal symbol hit determination tables shown in FIG. 8 (C). Based on the low-probability normal-figure hit / fail judgment based on the judgment values "0" and "1"), it is judged whether or not it is a hit (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal figure hit / fail judgment (S603, S604) is a hit (normal figure hit) (S605), and if it is judged to be a miss (NO in S605), the stop display is missed. A normal symbol (a symbol that is out of the ordinary) is determined (S606), and the process is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit (per normal figure) in S605 (YES in S605), the normal symbol (design per normal figure) to be stopped and displayed is determined (S607), and the normal symbol hit flag is turned ON (S608). ), Finish the process.

[Ordinary symbol random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 17, in the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each Fuzu hold in the Fuzu hold storage unit is shifted by one to the side read from the current position (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest hold storage in the normal figure hold storage unit, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth hold of the normal figure is cleared to 0 (S703). ), Finish the process. In this way, the general map hold is digested in the order of hold.

[Processing during normal symbol change]
As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol fluctuation processing (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S801), and if not (NO in S801), the process ends. .. On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802) and the normal symbol operation status is set to "3" (S803). Then, other processing such as stopping the variable display of the normal symbol at the display result (hit normal symbol or out-of-order normal symbol) according to the judgment result of the random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct is performed (S804), and this processing is performed. Finish.

[Normal symbol confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 19, in the normal symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit flag is ON (S901). If the normal map hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the normal map operation status is set to "1" (S905), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the flag per normal figure is ON (YES in S901), it is subsequently determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON, that is, whether or not the time saving state is in progress (S902). Then, if it is in the time saving state (YES in S902), the opening pattern in the time saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S903). As described above, the opening pattern in the time saving state is an opening pattern in which the opening for 2.0 seconds is repeated three times. Therefore, "3" is set in the second starting port opening counter that counts the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened.

On the other hand, if it is in the non-time saving state (NO in S902), the opening pattern in the non-time saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S906). As described above, the opening pattern in the non-time saving state is an opening pattern in which opening for 0.2 seconds is performed once. Therefore, "1" is set in the second start port opening counter. Then, following the set of the open pattern (S903, S906), the normal figure operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this process is completed.

[Ordinary electric accessory processing]
As shown in FIG. 20, in the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end flag per normal figure is ON (S1001). The normal-figure-hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second starting port 21 has been completed in the auxiliary game executed as a hit.

If the end flag per normal figure is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is open (S1002). If it is not open (NO in S1002), it is determined whether or not the time (timing) for opening the second starting port 21 has been reached (S1003), and if not (NO in S1003), the process is completed and the process is reached. If there is (YES in S1003), the second starting port 21 is opened (S1004), and the process is completed. On the other hand, if the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), it is determined in advance whether or not the time (timing) for closing the second starting port 21 has been reached (that is, after the second starting port 21 is opened). It is determined (whether or not the opened opening time has elapsed) (S1005), and if it has not been reached (NO in S1005), the processing is completed, and if it has been reached (YES in S1005), the second starting port 21 is closed (closed). ) (S1006).

Then, following the closing process (S1006) of the second starting port 21, the value of the second starting port opening counter is decremented by 1 (S1007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the second starting port opening counter is "0". (S1008). If it is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process is finished as it is in order to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is "0" (YES in S1008), the end process for hitting the normal figure to end the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the end flag for hitting the normal figure is set (S1010) to finish the process. The second start port opening counter becomes "0" when the second start port 21 is opened three times (opening operation of the movable member 23) in the non-time reduction state, and is set to "0" in the non-time reduction state. When the second starting port 21 is opened once, it becomes "0".

On the other hand, if the end flag per normal figure is ON in S1001 (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 for the number of times set in S903 or S906 has been completed. The hit end flag is turned off (S1011), the normal figure hit flag is turned off (S1012), the normal figure operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process is completed. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal figure operation process (FIG. 13).

[Ordinary electric accessory processing]
As shown in FIG. 20, in the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end flag per normal figure is ON (S1001). The normal-figure-hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second starting port 21 has been completed in the auxiliary game executed as a hit. If the end flag per normal figure is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is open (S1002). If it is not open (NO in S1002), it is determined whether or not the time (timing) for opening the second starting port 21 has been reached (S1003), and if not (NO in S1003), the process is completed and the process is reached. If so, the second starting port 21 is opened (S1004), and the process is completed. On the other hand, if the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), it is determined in advance whether or not the time (timing) for closing the second starting port 21 has been reached (that is, after the second starting port 21 is opened). It is determined (whether or not the opened opening time has passed) (S1005), and if it has not been reached (NO in S1005), the processing is completed, and if it has been reached (YES in S1005), the second starting port 21 is closed (closed). (S1006).

Then, following the closing process of the second starting port 21 (S1006), the value of the second starting port opening counter is decremented by 1 (S1007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the second starting port opening counter is "0". (S1008). If it is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process is finished as it is in order to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is "0" (YES in S1008), the end process for hitting the normal figure to end the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the end flag for hitting the normal figure is set (S1010) to finish the process. The second start port opening counter becomes "0" when the second start port 21 is opened three times (opening operation of the movable member 23) in the non-time reduction state, and is set to "0" in the non-time reduction state. When the second starting port 21 is opened once, it becomes "0".

On the other hand, if the end flag for normal drawing is ON in S1001 (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 for the number of times set in S903 or S906 has been completed. The end flag is turned off (S1011), the normal figure hit flag is turned off (S1012), the normal figure operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process is completed. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal figure operation process (FIG. 13).

[Special figure operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure operation process (S207) after the normal figure operation process (S206). As shown in FIG. 21, in the special figure operation process (S207), the processes related to the special symbol display 41 and the big prize device (the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36) are divided into five stages, and they are divided into five stages. "Special figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each stage of. When the special symbol operation status is "1" (YES in S1101), the special symbol standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the special symbol operation status is "2" (NO in S1101, YES in S1103). When the special symbol operation status is "3" (NO for both S1101 and S1103, YES for S1105) during special symbol change processing (S1104), special symbol confirmation processing (S1106), special symbol operation status is "4". When (S1101, S1103, S1105 are both NO, S1107 is YES), special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108) as a big hit game, and special figure operation status is "5" (S1101, S1103, S1105). , All of S1107 are NO), special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109) as a small hit game is performed respectively. The special figure operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 22, in the special symbol standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 21 (that is, the number of reserved balls in special figure 2) is “0” (S1201). ). Special figure 2 When the number of reserved balls is "0" (YES in S1201), that is, when the random number counter value acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is not stored, the first start is performed. It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the mouth 20 (that is, the number of reserved balls in FIG. 1) is “0” (S1206). Then, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is also "0" (YES in S1206), that is, when there is no memory of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20, the image is displayed. It is determined whether or not the display screen of the display device is being processed as a standby screen (during the execution of the demo screen for waiting for customers) (S1211), and if it is being processed (YES in S1211), the process is completed. If it is not being processed (NO in S1211), the standby screen setting process is executed to display the standby screen (S1212).

In S1201, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is not "0" (NO in S1201), that is, when there is one or more memory of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 21. , The special figure 2 hit / fail determination process (S1202), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1203), the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205) are performed in this order. Further, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is "0" but the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not "0" (YES in S1201 and NO in S1206), that is, the random number counter value related to the second starting port 21. Although there is no memory, if there is one or more memory of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20, the special figure 1 hit / miss determination process (S1207) and the special figure 1 variation described later will be described. The pattern selection process (S1208), the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) are performed in this order. As described above, in this embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol based on the first special figure hold is performed only when the number of balls held in the special figure 2 is "0" (YES in S1201). That is, the digestion of the second special symbol reservation (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special symbol reservation (variation display of the first special symbol). Then, in this embodiment, the hit / fail judgment based on the second special figure hold is more likely to be a big hit that is more profitable for the player than the hit / fail judgment based on the first special figure hold (FIG. 8 (B). ).

[Special Figure 2 Win / Fail Judgment Process]
As shown in FIG. 23, in the special figure 2 hit / miss determination process (S1202), first, as a determination value, it corresponds to the lowest area of the special figure hold storage unit of the RAM (that is, the first item of the second special figure hold). The value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not (the oldest stored) stored in the RAM area) is read out (S1301). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in a high probability state (S1302). Then, if it is not in the high probability state (NO in S1302), that is, if it is in the normal state, the hit judgment table for the normal state (the jackpot judgment value is "3"" in the hit judgment table (see FIG. 8A). , "397")) to make a pass / fail judgment (S1303). On the other hand, if it is in the high probability state (YES in S1302), the hit / fail judgment is made based on the jackpot judgment table for the high probability state in the hit determination table (see FIG. 8A) (S1309). In the jackpot determination table for high probability states, the jackpot determination values are "3", "53", "113", "173", "227", "281", "337", "397", "449", It is said to be "503".

When it is determined that the result of the hit / fail judgment (S1303, S1309) is "big hit" (YES in S1304), the value (label-TRND-AS) of the random number counter for determining the big hit type is read out and shown in FIG. 8 (B). The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table shown (S1310), the jackpot symbol is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1311), the jackpot flag is turned ON (S1312), and the process is completed. .. In the case of the hit / fail judgment related to the first special symbol, the jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol, and in the case of the hit / fail judgment related to the second special symbol, the second special symbol is used. The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table of. When it is determined as a big hit by the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (special figure 1), it is selected as one of 15R 1st big hit, 15R 2nd big hit, 15R 3rd big hit and 2R 4th big hit, and 2nd. If it is determined to be a big hit in the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol (special figure 2), it is regarded as a 15R 5th big hit or a 15R 6th big hit (see FIG. 8 (B)).

Corresponding to this, in this embodiment, as the jackpot flag, it is turned ON when the type of jackpot is 15R 1st jackpot, 15R 2nd jackpot, 15R 3rd jackpot, 15R 5th jackpot or 15R 6th jackpot. A long hit flag to be set and a short hit flag to be turned ON when the 2R 4th big hit is provided. Then, when the 2R 4th big hit and the short hit flag are turned ON, the 2R lamp (see FIG. 4) of the round display 45 lights up at the timing when the 2R 4th big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. Will be done. Specifically, the display mode is such as "2R ▲ 15R △" (for example, ▲: lighting, Δ: extinguishing). Further, when the long hit flag is turned on as any of the 15R 1st to 3rd big hits, the 15R 5th big hit, and the 15R 6th big hit, the 15R lamp (Fig.) At the timing when the corresponding big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. 4) is lit and displayed. Specifically, the display mode is as shown in "2R △ 15R ▲".

Here, the jackpot judgment (special symbol hit / fail judgment) and the jackpot type determination judgment may be referred to as "judgment" respectively, or may be referred to as "judgment" including which jackpot symbol is obtained by performing the jackpot judgment. good. In addition, these results may be referred to as "judgment results".

On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the hit / fail determination (S1303, S1309) is not a "big hit" (NO in S1304), it is determined whether or not it is a small hit (S1305). That is, it is determined whether or not the value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not matches any of the small hit determination values "101" to "105" (FIG. 8 (A)). See). Then, when it is determined that it is not a "small hit" (NO in S1305), an outlier symbol is determined (S1308), and the process is completed. That is, if the result of the hit / fail judgment (S1303, S1309) is neither a "big hit" nor a "small hit", the result is "missing". On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the small hit determination (S1305) is "small hit" (YES in S1305), the small hit symbol is determined (S1306), the small hit flag is turned ON (S1307), and the process is performed. Finish. In addition, a random number for determining whether or not it is a small hit may be provided separately from the random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process]
In the special symbol standby process (see FIG. 22), the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1203) after the special figure 2 hit / miss determination process (S1202). As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state (whether or not the time saving flag is ON) (S1401). ). Then, if it is not in the time saving state (NO in S1401), that is, if it is in the non-time saving state, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S1402), and if it is ON (YES in S1402), it is in the non-time saving state. The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the medium jackpot table (the portion of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 that is in a non-time saving state and corresponds to the jackpot). S1403). If the fluctuation pattern is decided, the fluctuation time is also decided. Further, in this embodiment, the non-time saving medium big hit table is divided according to whether the big hit is a long hit (15R big hit) or a short hit (2R big hit) (see FIG. 9). However, this process is a variation pattern selection process for the special figure 2, and only the 15R fifth big hit (long hit) exists in the big hit won in the lottery of the special figure 2 (see FIG. 6). Therefore, the portion referred to in this process is always the location of the long hit, and the variation pattern P1 or P2 is selected. The table for medium and large hits in the non-time saving state does not have to be divided into a long hit table and a short hit table. This also applies to the table for medium-sized big hits in a time-saving state, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S1402), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (S1405). Then, if the small hit flag is ON (YES in S1405), the variation is made with reference to the non-time saving state medium / small hit table (the portion of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9, which is in the non-time saving state and corresponds to the small hit). Pattern A variation pattern is selected based on the random number counter value (S1409). Specifically, in this embodiment, the variation pattern P4 is always selected.

Also, if the small hit flag is not ON (NO in S1405), it means that it is neither a big hit nor a small hit. In this case, is the number of reserved 2nd special symbols "1" or "2"? Judge whether or not (S1406). Since the reserved number referred to here is the stored number including the information for which the fluctuation pattern is determined by this processing, the reserved stored number is set to any value of "1" to "4". Then, when it is determined in S1406 that the hold number is "1" or "2" (YES in S1406), the first hold number out-of-time table in the non-time reduction state (non-time reduction among the fluctuation pattern tables shown in FIG. 9). The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the state, the deviation, and the portion corresponding to the number of reserved balls “1, 2” (S1407). In this embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P5 to P8 is selected.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1406 that the hold number is not "1" or "2", that is, "3" or "4" (NO in S1406), the second hold number loss table during the non-time saving state (Fig.) In the fluctuation pattern table shown in 9, the fluctuation pattern is calculated based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the non-time saving state, the deviation, and the portion corresponding to the number of reserved balls "3, 4"). Select (S1408). In this embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P9 to P12 is selected. Here, the first hold number loss table in the non-time saving state is set with a higher possibility of selecting a fluctuation pattern of a relatively long fluctuation time than the second hold number loss table. Further, the shortest changeable time (12000 ms) that can be selected is also set to be longer than that of the table for the second hold number deviation (4000 ms). That is, at the time of disengagement, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works, and when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is "3" or "4", the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is "". A fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time than when it is "1" or "2" is selected.

Further, in the above-mentioned S1401, when it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving state (YES in S1401), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S1410 in FIG. 25). Then, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1410), the fluctuation pattern is referred to in the time-saving state medium-big hit table (the portion of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9, which corresponds to the time-saving state and the jackpot). The variation pattern is selected based on the random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1411). As described above, this process is a variation pattern selection process for the special figure 2, and since there is only a 15R fifth big hit (long hit) in the big hit won in the lottery of the special figure 2 (FIG. 6). (See), in S1411, the variation pattern P13 or P14 corresponding to the long hit is selected.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1410 that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S1410), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (S1412). Then, if the small hit flag is ON (YES in S1412), the variable pattern random number is referred to in the time-saving state medium-small hit table (the part of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 that corresponds to the time-saving state and small hit). The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the counter value (S1416). Specifically, in this embodiment, the variation pattern P16 is always selected.

Further, when it is determined in S1412 that the small hit flag is not ON (NO in S1412), that is, when it is out of order, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved second special symbols is "1" (S1413). The number of holdings referred to here is the same as described above, and the number of holdings is set to any value of "1" to "4". Then, when it is determined that the number of holdings is "1" (YES in S1413), the table for the third holding number out of the time saving state (the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 1 ”), and the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1414). In this embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P17 to P20 is selected. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1413 that the number of holds is not "1", that is, the number of holds is any of "2" to "4" (NO in S1413), the table for removing the number of fourth holds during the time saving state. Refer to (the part of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9, which is in a time-saving state, is out of alignment, and corresponds to the number of reserved balls "2 to 4"), and the fluctuation pattern is based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). Select (S1415). In this embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P21 to P24 is selected.

In this way, in the fluctuation pattern table during the time reduction state (the part corresponding to the time reduction state in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls at the time of disconnection is the function of the number of reserved balls "2". It works when "4". Further, when the long hit is won among the big hits, the fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than in the non-time saving state. That is, the fluctuation pattern table in the time-saving state is a table in which the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation pattern table in the non-time-saving state. As a result, in the time-saving state, the digestion speed of the special figure hold is faster than in the non-time-saving state (normal state) (the game during the time-saving progresses rapidly).

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, another process (S1404) shown in FIG. 24 is performed to complete this process. In the other processing (S1404), a variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern (variation pattern specification command corresponding to the special figure 2) is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set fluctuation pattern specification command is included in the fluctuation start command described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special Figure 2 Random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 26, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, when the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit is one lower side (for example, when the second special figure reservation storage unit consists of the address space corresponding to the addresses "0000" to "0003", the address. Shift to the "0000" side) (S1502). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the second special figure reservation storage unit, that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth piece of the second special figure reservation (when stored up to the upper limit number). Clear 0 (S1503) to finish this process.

After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205) in the special symbol standby process (S1102) shown in FIG. 22 is executed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1205), the special figure operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started.

Further, in the special symbol standby process (S1102) of FIG. 22, when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0" and the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is not "0" (YES in S1201, NO in S1206). In this order, the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1207), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1208), the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) are performed in this order.

[Special Figure 1 Win / Fail Judgment Process]
As shown in FIG. 27, in the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1207), the process (S1601 to S1612) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 hit / fail determination process (S1202) shown in FIG. 23. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted.

However, since this process is related to the special figure 1, in the S1601, it is stored in the lowestmost area of the first special figure hold storage unit of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first item of the first special figure hold). The random number counter value (label-TRND-A) for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is read out. Further, in the type determination of the jackpot in S1610, any of the 15R first jackpot, the 15R second jackpot, the 15R third jackpot, and the 2R fourth jackpot may be determined (FIG. 8B). As shown in the column of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in FIG. 8B, the distribution rate of each jackpot is 40% for the 15R first jackpot, 20% for the 15R second jackpot, and 15R third jackpot. Is 30%, and the 2R 4th jackpot is 10%. When it is determined that any of the 15R first jackpot, the 15R second jackpot, and the 15R third jackpot is determined by the type determination of the jackpot, the long hit flag is turned ON as the jackpot flag in S1612. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 2R 4th big hit, the short hit flag is turned ON as the big hit flag in S1612.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1208), processing (S1701 to S1720) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203) shown in FIGS. 24 and 25. )I do. Therefore, a detailed explanation of this process is omitted.

However, since this processing is related to the special figure 1, if YES in S1702 (FIG. 28) (that is, when the jackpot flag is ON), the type of jackpot is further 15R jackpot (15R first jackpot, 15Rth). It is determined whether or not it is (either 2 big hits or 15R 3rd big hits) (S1703). Then, in the case of a 15R jackpot (long hit) (YES in S1703), refer to the 15R jackpot table in the non-time saving state (the part corresponding to the non-time saving state and the long hit in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Then, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1704). Specifically, the variation pattern P1 or P2 is selected.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1703 that it is not a 15R jackpot (NO in S1703), that is, when it is a 2R fourth jackpot (short hit), the 2R jackpot table in the non-time saving state (of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value with reference to the non-time saving state and the part corresponding to the short hit (S1706). Specifically, the variation pattern P3 is selected.

Further, in this special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process, even when YES in S1712 (FIG. 29) (that is, when the jackpot flag is ON), the type of jackpot is further 15R jackpot (15R first jackpot, 15R second jackpot). , 15R, any of the third big hits) (S1713). If it is a 15R jackpot (long hit) (YES in S1713), refer to the 15R jackpot table (the part of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 that corresponds to the time saving state and the long hit). Fluctuation pattern A variation pattern is selected based on the random number counter value (S1714). Specifically, the variation pattern P13 or P14 is selected.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1713 that it is not a 15R big hit (NO in S1713), that is, when it is a 2R 4th big hit (short hit), the 2R big hit table in the time saving state (time saving among the variation pattern tables shown in FIG. 9). The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value with reference to the state and the part corresponding to the short hit (S1715). Specifically, the variation pattern P15 is selected.

In the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process, after the variation pattern is selected, other processes (S1705, FIG. 28) are performed to finish this process. In other processing (S1705), a variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern (variation pattern specification command corresponding to Special Figure 1) is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set fluctuation pattern specification command is included in the fluctuation start command described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special Figure 1 Random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, in the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit is shifted to the lower side by one (S1802). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit, that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth piece of the first special figure reservation (when stored up to the upper limit number). Clear 0 (S1803) to finish this process.

After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) of FIG. 22 is executed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1210), the special figure operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol change]
As shown in FIG. 31, in the special symbol variation processing (S1104), first, the variation time of the special symbol (the variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in S1203 or S1208 of FIG. 22, see FIG. 9). Determine if it has passed (S1901). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in S1901), the process ends. As a result, the variable display of the special symbol is continued.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S1901), the fluctuation stop command is set (S1902). Then, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (S1903), if it is ON (YES in S1903), the probability variation counter is subtracted by 1 (S1904), and whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is "0". Is determined (S1905). When it is determined in S1905 that the probability change counter is "0", the probability change flag is turned off (S1906), and the process proceeds to S1907. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation flag is not ON (NO in S1903), or if it is determined that the probability variation counter is not "0" (NO in S1905), the process proceeds to S1907.

Then, in S1907, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S1907), and when it is determined that the time saving flag is ON (YES in S1907), the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbol executed during the time saving state is counted. The value of the time saving counter is subtracted by 1 (S1908), it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter is "0" (S1909), and if it is "0" (YES in S1909), the time saving flag is turned off. (S1910), proceed to the processing of S1911. If it is determined that the time saving flag is not ON (NO in S1907), or if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (NO in S1909), the process proceeds to S1911. In S1911, the special figure operation status is set to "3" (S1911). Then, other processing such as stopping the variable display of the special symbol at a result corresponding to the determination result of the special symbol hit / fail determination random number and the big hit type determination random number is performed (S1912), and this processing is completed.

Here, when the probability change flag is turned off in S1906 or the time saving flag is turned off in S1910, the gaming state shifts to a low probability state or a non-time saving state (low base state). In this way, when the game state changes with the end (change stop) of the change display of the special symbol, in S1912, as another process, a game state specification command indicating the changed game state is set in the output buffer of the RAM. Perform the processing. By sending the game state designation command to the sub control board 90 by the output process (S201), the game state can be grasped on the sub control side, and various effects according to the game state can be executed. In this embodiment, as a game state designation command, a command corresponding to the game state that can be controlled by the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided in advance. Specifically, a "normal specification command" that specifies a low-accuracy low-base state, a "time-saving specification command" that specifies a low-accuracy high-base state, and a "latent specification command" that specifies a high-accuracy low-base state. It is supposed to be equipped with a "probability change specification command" that specifies a high probability high base state.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the special symbol determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S2001). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2001), then whether or not the jackpot type is 15R jackpot (15R first jackpot, 15R second jackpot, 15th third jackpot, or 15R fifth jackpot). Is determined (S2002). Then, if it is a 15R jackpot (that is, if the long hit flag is ON), a round to be executed during the jackpot game (in the mode of opening once per round, one round is from opening to closing of the big winning opening). The value of the round counter that counts the number of times of If it is a big hit, it is an opening pattern for 15R 1st big hit, if it is a 15R 2nd big hit, it is an opening pattern for 15R 2nd big hit, if it is a 15R 3rd big hit, it is an opening pattern for 15R 3rd big hit, and it is a 15R 5th big hit. If there is, an opening pattern for the 15R 5th jackpot is set, and if there is a 15R 6th jackpot, an opening pattern for the 15R 6th jackpot is set (S2003).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2002 that it is not a 15R big hit (that is, when the short hit flag is ON), the big hit type is 2R 4th big hit, so the value of the round counter is set to "2" and the big hit is set. As the opening pattern of the winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35), an opening pattern for 2R 4th big hit (see FIG. 6) is set (S2004).

After finishing the processing of S2003 or S2004, in order to start the big hit game, the big hit opening command is set (S2005), the opening production of the big hit game is started (S2006), and the special figure operation status is set to "4". (S2007).

Further, when it is determined in S2001 that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2001), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (S2008). As a result, if the small hit flag is ON (YES in S2008), the value of the small hit opening counter that counts the number of times the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is opened during the small hit game is set to "2". As an opening pattern for the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35), an opening pattern for small hits (see FIG. 6) is set (S2009). Then, in order to start the small hit game, the opening command of the small hit is set (S2010), the opening effect of the small hit game is started (S2011), and the special figure operation status is set to "5" (S2012). .. If the small hit flag is not ON in S2008 (NO in S2008), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game will start, so the special figure operation status is set to "1" and the process is completed.

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game)]
As shown in FIG. 33, in the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108), first, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag is ON (S2101), and when it is determined to be ON (YES in S2101), the probability change flag is turned OFF (YES in S2101). S2102). Further, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S2103), and when it is determined to be ON (YES in S2103), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S2104). That is, during the execution of the big hit game, it is controlled to a low probability state and a non-time saving state. In this embodiment, since the low base state is always in the non-time saving state, the low probability low base state is also controlled during the execution of the big hit game.

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). The jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that all the jackpots (first jackpot 30 and second jackpot 35) have been opened (the jackpot game has ended) in the jackpot game. If the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2105), it is determined whether or not the jackpot (first prize slot 30 or second prize slot 35) is open (S2106). If it is not open (NO in S2106), it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35), that is, the opening time of the big hit has passed. It is determined whether or not it is time to start the first round, or whether it is time to start the next round (next opening) after the time of the interval between rounds has elapsed (S2107). This is determined based on the big winning opening opening pattern set for each big hit type described above. For example, if it is before the start of the first round, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the opening period ends and the first opening process of the first round is executed. Further, if it is after the first round has already started, it is determined by whether or not the previous round has ended and the predetermined interval period has ended. The round is also simply referred to as "R" and also referred to as "round game". In addition, the opening period is a period set before the first opening operation of the big winning opening in the big hit game is started and after the variable display of the special symbol (directed symbol) becomes infeasible, and is the "start period". Also called. In this embodiment, the opening period (opening time) of the jackpot is 8000 ms (8 seconds).

If the judgment result of S2107 is NO, the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the determination result of S2107 is YES, it is determined whether or not the executed round corresponds to either the first round or the second round, that is, whether or not it is a V round (S2108). ). This may be determined by using the value of the round counter for each jackpot type, or may be determined by providing a round counter that counts the number of rounds to be executed separately. If the round to be executed is not a V round (NO in S2108), that is, if it is any of 3 to 15 rounds, proceed to S2110 and follow the opening pattern according to the type of jackpot (see FIG. 6). In order to open the winning opening 30, the first large winning device 31 is operated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round to be executed is the V round (1st round or 2nd round) (YES in S2108), the V validity period setting process (S2109) is performed and then the process proceeds to S2110 to determine the type of jackpot. The second prize-winning device 36 is operated in order to open the second prize-winning opening 35 according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 6). Further, when opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35), that is, when starting a round, a round start command of the corresponding round is set. For example, a round start command that can specify the round to be started is set, such as "1R start command" for the start of the first round and "2R start command" for the start of the second round. The set round start command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 by the output processing of S201.

In the V validity period setting process (S2109), a specific area is set for a few seconds during the opening of the second special winning opening 35 and after the closing of the second large winning opening 35 in the V round (1 round or 2 rounds in this embodiment). The period for determining that the detection of the game ball by the sensor 39a is valid (corresponding to the first period) is set. In this embodiment, the period other than this (including during a small hit or when the special game is not executed) is a period (corresponding to the second period) in which the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Is set to. Here, determining that the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is valid means that the V flag is turned ON based on the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a (S2401 to S2403 of the specific area sensor detection process described later). The determination that the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is invalid means that the V flag is not turned on even if the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is detected.

Here, when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a and the V flag is turned ON, the game state display 46 is set to a predetermined display mode, and the game state after the big hit game ends becomes a high probability state. Is notified. Specifically, the game status display 46 is composed of three LEDs of "a1a2a3". Then, in this embodiment, in the normal state (low probability state), the display mode is "a1 □ a2 □ a3 □" (for example, □: off, ■: on). Further, when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the big hit game and the V flag is turned ON, the display mode is "a1 ■ a2 ■ a3 ■". Then, when the big hit game is completed and the game state is set to the high probability state, the display mode is "a1 □ a2 □ a3 □". Further, the lighting control timing of the game status display 46 is not limited to such timing, and even if the game ball passes through a specific area during the big hit game, the display mode of "a1 □ a2 □ a3 □" remains. , "A1 ■ a2 ■ a3 ■" may be set at the timing of transitioning to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game, and "a1 □ a2 □ a3 □" may be displayed at the timing of transitioning from the high probability state to the low probability state. ..

That is, in the specific area sensor detection process (S208) described later, the V flag is turned on only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the specific area 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is turned on outside the V valid period (V invalid period). The V flag is not turned on when the V passage is detected in the middle). When the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is ON, that is, the game state after the big hit game is set to the high probability state (see the game state setting process described later). By doing so, the V flag is not turned on based on the passage of V due to fraudulent activity, that is, the V flag is not illegally set to the high probability state.

Further, if there is a V pass in the V round (1R or 2R) of the big hit game, the game state after the end of the big hit game is set to a high probability state, while even if there is a V pass during the small hit game, If the game state before the small hit game is the normal state, the game state after the small hit game is also set to the normal state, and if the game state before the small hit game is the high probability state, after the small hit game is finished. The game state is also a high probability state. That is, the probability of winning or failing is not changed before and after the small hit game.

In this embodiment, in the V validity period setting process (S2109), even when the 15R second and third big hits are made, the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is determined to be valid (first period). However, as another aspect, in the case of the 15R second and third big hits, the first period may not be set in the V round. That is, in the case of the 15R second and third big hits, the V round may be set in the second period. In the big hit game related to the 15R 2nd and 3rd big hits, the game ball enters the 2nd big winning opening 35 because the opening time of the 2nd big winning opening 35 is set to 0.1 seconds, which is an extremely short time. The possibility is extremely low, but if you set it in the second period, the V flag will not turn on even if you should hit the ball. This makes it possible to prevent the V flag from being turned on illegally or the V flag from being turned on due to a rare entry. In this embodiment, the first round and the second round are defined as V rounds, and the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is enabled in the V round, but the location of the V round is not limited to this.

If the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is open in S2106 (YES in S2106), the maximum number of balls that can be entered into the big winning opening in that round is the specified maximum number of balls. It is determined whether or not (10 pieces per round in this embodiment) has been reached (S2111). If the specified number of balls has not been reached (NO in S2111), it is time to close the big prize opening (timing), that is, the predetermined opening time after opening the big winning opening (see Fig. 6). Is determined whether or not has passed (S2112). Then, if the opening time of the big winning opening has not passed (NO in S2112), the processing is completed.

On the other hand, when the specified number of balls has been reached (YES in S2111) or when the opening time of the big winning opening has elapsed (YES in S2112), that is, one of the two round end conditions is satisfied. If so, the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is closed (S2113). Then, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is "0" (S2115). If it is determined that it is not "0" (NO in S2115), the process is completed to start the next round. Further, when closing the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35), that is, when ending the round, the round end command of the corresponding round is set. For example, a round end command that can specify the end round is set, such as "1R end command" for the end of the first round and "2R end command" for the end of the second round. This set round end command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 by the output processing of S201. The round end command is transmitted at the end of the rounds other than the final round of the big hit game, that is, when it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is not "0". For example, if the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed is 15R jackpot game, the round end command is transmitted until the end of 14R, but is not transmitted at the end of 15R. This is because at the end of the final round, the ending command set in the processing of S2116, which will be described later, is transmitted.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the round counter is "0" (YES in S2115), the jackpot ending command is set as the jackpot ending process to end the jackpot game (S2116), and the jackpot ending effect is started. (S2117). Then, the jackpot end flag is set (S2118), and the process is completed. If the round counter is a long hit (15R big hit), it will be "0" if the big winning opening is opened 15 times, and if it is a short hit (2R big hit), the big winning opening will be opened twice. When executed, it becomes "0".

In S2116, from among multiple predetermined ending commands, the game state when the current big hit (the big hit that has reached the end) occurs, the type of the big hit game this time, the game state after the big hit game, etc. The ending command is selected and the selected command is set. The type of ending command set in this way determines the ending period (ending time) to be executed (set). The ending period is a period set after all the opening operations (round games) of the big winning openings 30 in the big hit game are completed and before the variable display of the special symbol (directed symbol) can be executed. , Also called "end period". During the ending period (end period), the large winning opening 30 is closed. The effect performed during this "end period" is also called "end effect (ending effect)".

The types of ending commands set in S2116 are as follows. First, the game state at the time of the big hit is a low probability low base state (no low probability time reduction), and the type of the big hit is 15R 1st big hit, 15R 2nd big hit, 15R 5th big hit or 15R 6th big hit. And, when the V flag is ON, that is, when the high probability state (high probability high base state) is reached after the big hit game, the ending command for executing the ending period (first ending period) of 17,000 ms ("" (Also called the first ending command) is set. On the other hand, when the game state and the big hit type at the time of the big hit are the same and the V flag is OFF, that is, when the high accuracy high base state (time saving state) is reached after the big hit game, 8000 ms. An ending command (also referred to as a "second ending command") for executing an ending period (second ending period) is set.

This is because in the case of 15R 1st jackpot, 15R 2nd jackpot, 15R 5th jackpot or 15R 6th jackpot, if the game ball passes V during the jackpot game, there is a high probability that the game state after the jackpot game will be in the ending period. An effect (first specific effect) indicating to the player that the state (probability change mode) is reached is executed, and in the case of V non-passage (passing through a non-specific area), the time-reduced state (time-reduced mode) is set in the ending period. This is due to the execution of an effect (second specific effect) indicating that the state is to be achieved (indicating to the player that the state will be in the low probability state or not indicating to the player that the state will be in the high probability state). Further, in the present embodiment, the first specific effect indicating the player to shift to the high probability state is regarded as a relatively long time effect, and the player is shown to shift to the time saving state (high probability state). The second specific effect (which does not show the player) is considered to be a relatively short period of time. As described above, in this embodiment, since it is necessary to execute ending periods of different lengths according to the result of passing through a specific area in the V round (whether the V flag is ON or OFF), the ending period passes through the specific area. It is possible to set different lengths of ending periods according to the results. As a result, the sub-control unit that has received the ending command can execute the ending effect of different effect modes and effect periods (effect time) according to the ending period (according to the game state after the big hit game). Become. However, since the 15R 2nd jackpot and the 15R 6th jackpot are defined as "V non-passing scheduled jackpots", it is extremely unlikely that the game ball will pass through the specific area 39 during this jackpot game.

Here, in the V round (in the big hit game), the information indicating the result of passing through the specific area as to whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area is also referred to as "specific area information". This specific area information has information indicating that the game ball has passed the specific area in the V round and information indicating that the game ball has not passed the specific area in the V round, and determines the ending period. The ending period determining means (ending period determining means) can determine the ending period based on the specific area information.

In addition, the game state when a big hit occurs is a low base state (no low probability time reduction, no high probability time reduction) or a high base state (low probability time reduction, high probability time reduction), and the jackpot type is 15R third big hit. In the case of, the ending that executes the ending period (third ending period) of 6000 ms regardless of whether the V flag is ON or OFF (regardless of the specific area passage information (ON / OFF of the V flag)). Set a command (also called "third ending command"). In the case of the 15R 3rd big hit, in principle, V does not pass during the big hit game (the possibility is extremely low), and the base state is always low after the big hit game. This is because the effect mode (effect mode) is set to the "normal mode" which is the initial mode executed after the power is turned on. That is, in the ending effect executed in the ending period related to the 15R third big hit, the "effect of shifting to the normal mode" (third specific effect) is performed, so that the ending period to be set is not changed depending on the result of passing through the specific area. Has been done. However, the "normal mode" is, in principle, an effect mode showing a low-accuracy low-base state, but even if the "normal mode" is set after the big hit game is over, the high-accuracy low-base (although unlikely) is high. It may be in a state. However, since the 15R third jackpot is defined as a "V non-passing scheduled jackpot", it is extremely difficult for the game ball to pass through a specific area during this jackpot game. Further, the third ending period is shorter than the first ending period and the second ending period. The low probability low base state is the most unfavorable gaming state among the gaming states set after the big hit game, so if a time is provided to notify the transition to such a gaming state for a long time, the player's willingness to play the game. May decline. In particular, when the "15R third big hit" is obtained in the high-accuracy low-base state or the high-base state, the tendency is remarkable because the advantageous state shifts to the disadvantageous state (normal state). For this reason, a short ending period is set and the game is to proceed quickly.

Further, the gaming state at the time of the big hit is a low probability high base state (with low probability time reduction) or a high probability high base state (with high probability time reduction), and the types of the big hits are 15R 1st big hit and 15R 2nd big hit. , 15R 5th jackpot or 15R 6th jackpot, regardless of whether the V flag is ON or OFF (regardless of the specific area passage information (V flag ON / OFF)), the ending of 4000 ms. An ending command (also referred to as a "fourth ending command") for executing a period (fourth ending period) is set. The 4th ending period (4000ms) is shorter than the 1st to 3rd ending periods (17000ms, 8000ms, 6000ms) (the shortest period), but this is the 15R first hit in the high base state. , 15R 2nd jackpot, 15R 5th jackpot and 15R 6th jackpot are all so-called "ream villas" jackpots in which the game state after the jackpot game becomes a high base state again, and the games in the villa. This is to speed up the process.

Here, even if the length of the fourth ending period is the same 4000 ms, the content (effect mode) of the ending effect is different depending on the specific area passage information (ON / OFF of the V flag), so that the V flag is turned ON. The ending command to be set is different depending on whether the corresponding fourth ending period is executed or the fourth ending period corresponding to the V flag OFF is executed. That is, when an ending command (also referred to as "fourth ending command A") for executing the fourth ending period corresponding to the V flag ON is set, the gaming state after the big hit game is highly accurate in the ending effect corresponding to this. An effect (fourth specific effect A) indicating to the player that the high base state (probability change mode) is reached is executed. On the other hand, when an ending command (also referred to as "fourth ending command B") that executes the fourth ending period corresponding to the V flag OFF is set, the gaming state after the big hit game is low in the ending effect corresponding to this. An effect (fourth specific effect B) indicating to the player that the high base state (time saving mode) is set is executed. Therefore, the 4th specific effect A after the big hit game related to the 15R big hit in the high accuracy and high base state is an effect indicating the continuation of the probability change, and the 4th specific effect B is the effect indicating the end of the probability change (time saving rush). Further, the fourth specific effect A after the big hit game related to the 15R big hit in the low accuracy and high base state is an effect showing a probability change rush, and the fourth specific effect B is an effect showing the continuation of a short time.

In addition, the game state when a big hit occurs is a low base state (no low probability time reduction, no high probability time reduction) or a high base state (low probability time reduction, high probability time reduction), and the jackpot type is 2R 4th big hit. In the case of, the common ending period (fifth ending period) of 8000 ms is executed regardless of whether the V flag is ON or OFF (regardless of the specific area passage information (ON / OFF of the V flag)). The ending command to be executed (also referred to as "fifth ending command") is set. In the case of the 2R 4th big hit, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the special symbol winning / failing determination probability (big hit probability) is high or low in the effect mode (effect mode) after the end of the big hit game. This is because the probability of non-notification state (also simply referred to as "non-notification mode") is set. That is, in the ending effect executed in the ending period related to the 2R 4th big hit, the "effect indicating that the player enters the non-notification mode" (fifth specification) regardless of whether the V flag is ON or OFF (V passage / non-pass). The ending period set according to the result of passing through a specific area is not changed in order to perform the effect). In this embodiment, the second ending period and the fifth ending period are set to the same length period (8000 ms), but instead, the first ending period and the fifth ending period are set to the same length period. It may be set to (1700 ms).

In S2116, set one of the above ending commands. The set ending command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 at a predetermined timing by the output process (S201). The sub-control unit 90 that has received the ending command performs a predetermined ending effect execution process based on the ending command.

If it is determined in S2105 that the jackpot end flag is ON (YES in S2105), since the final round has ended, it is determined whether or not the execution time (ending time) of the jackpot ending effect has elapsed. (S2119) If the ending time has not passed (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2119), after turning off the jackpot end flag (S2120), the game state setting process (S2121) described later is performed. Then, the jackpot flag is turned off (S2122), the special figure operation status is set to "1" (S2123), and the process is completed. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the special symbol standby processing (S1102) is executed again as the special symbol operation processing (S207). It can be said that the game control microcomputer 81 that executes the above special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108) functions as a “special game execution means”.

[Game status setting process]
As shown in FIG. 34, in the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the V flag is ON (S2201). The V flag is a flag that is turned on in the specific area sensor detection process (FIG. 36) described later. Then, if the V flag is ON (YES in S2201), the probability change flag is turned ON (S2202), "100" is set in the probability change counter (S2203), the V flag is turned OFF (S2204), and S2205. Proceed to processing. On the other hand, if the V flag is OFF (NO in S2201), the process proceeds to S2205 without turning the probability change flag ON. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is determined whether or not to set the gaming state after the end of the big hit game to the high probability state based on whether or not the V flag is turned ON in this gaming state setting process. ..

In S2205, it is determined whether or not the completed jackpot game (the jackpot game executed this time) is a 15R jackpot. Then, when it is determined that it is a 15R jackpot (YES in S2205), it is determined whether or not the 15R jackpot is a 15R third jackpot (S2206), and if it is a 15R third jackpot (YES in S2206), it is as it is. If the processing is completed and it is not the 15R 3rd jackpot, that is, if it is either the 15R 1st, 2nd, or 5th jackpot (NO in S2206), the time saving flag is turned ON (S2207) and the time saving counter is set to "100". "(S2208) to finish the process. Here, if the big hit game this time is related to the 15R 1st big hit or the 15R 5th big hit, the game ball passes through the specific area 39 (V passage) during the big hit game and the V flag is turned ON. Since it should be (YES in S2201), the game state after the big hit game in this case will be the high accuracy and high base state. Also, if the big hit game this time is related to the 15R second big hit, V should not have passed and the V flag should not be turned on during the big hit game (NO in S2201), so after the big hit game in this case is completed. The game state of is low accuracy and high base state. Also, if the big hit game this time is related to the 15R 3rd big hit, V should not have passed and the V flag should not be turned on during the big hit game (NO in S2201), so after the big hit game in this case is completed. The game state of is low accuracy and low base state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2205 that the completed jackpot game (the jackpot game executed this time) is not a 15R jackpot, that is, it is a 2R 4th jackpot (NO in S2205), the game state before the start of this jackpot game, that is, If it is determined whether or not the game state at the time of the 2R 4th big hit was the time saving state (S2209) and it is determined that the game state was not the time saving state (NO in S2209), the processing is performed as it is without turning on the time saving flag. To finish. As a result, if the V flag is not turned on in this big hit game (NO in S2201), the game state after the big hit game is in a low probability low base state, and the V flag is turned on in this big hit game. In the case (YES in S2201), the game state after the big hit game is high accuracy and low base state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2209 that the game state at the time of the 2R 4th big hit was the time saving state (YES in S2209), the time saving flag is turned ON (S2207) and "100" is set in the time saving counter. (S2208) and finish the process. As a result, if the V flag is not turned on in this big hit game (NO in S2201), the game state after the big hit game is in a low accuracy high base state, and the V flag is turned on in this big hit game. In the case (YES in S2201), the game state after the big hit game is high accuracy and high base state.

In each of the high-accuracy high-base state, the low-accuracy high-base state, and the high-accuracy low-base state, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner 100 times, and the next big hit occurs. It ends when it is established.

Further, the process (S2209) of determining whether the game state before the start of the big hit game related to the 2R 4th big hit is the time saving state is performed by checking the operating state of the time saving function and the high base function before and after the big hit game. This is to make it the same as the state (condition) when the above occurs. If these operating states are different between the case of the 2R 4th big hit and the case of the small hit, even if it is difficult to recognize which hit is due to the opening pattern of the big winning opening, the subsequent gaming state (time saving function and time saving function and This is because it is possible to easily determine which hit is due to the operating state of the high base function). This makes it difficult to distinguish between the 2R 4th big hit and the small hit by the opening pattern of the big winning opening, and also by the operating state of the time saving function and the high base generation function after that.

When the game state after the end of the big hit game is determined as described above, the game state specification command for specifying the game state after the end of the big hit game is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2210). That is, when the probability change flag is turned ON in S2202 and the time saving flag is turned ON in S2207, the "probability change specification command" is set, and when only the time saving flag is turned ON without turning the probability change flag ON, " If you set the "time saving specification command" and turn on only the probability change flag without turning on the time saving flag, set the "latent specification command" and if you do not turn on both the probability change flag and the time saving flag. Set the "normal specification command". The game state designation command set in S2210 is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game)]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small hit end flag is a flag indicating that all the opening of the second big winning opening 35 has been completed in the small hit game. If the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether or not the second big winning opening 35 is open (S2302). If it is not open (NO in S2302), it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35), that is, the opening time of the small hit has elapsed. Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the first opening, or whether it is time to start the next opening after the time of the interval between the multiple openings has elapsed (S2303). If the judgment result of S2303 is NO, the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the determination result of S2303 is YES, the V invalid period setting process (S2304) is performed, then the process proceeds to S2305, and the second large winning opening 35 is opened according to the small hit opening pattern (see FIG. 6). The second big prize device 36 is operated. In this embodiment, the opening period (opening time) of the small hit is set to 8000 ms (8 seconds), which is the same as that of the big hit.

In the V invalid period setting process (S2304), the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is invalidated during the opening of the second large winning opening 35 and for several seconds after the closing of the second large winning opening 35 in the small hit game. Set to the judgment period (second period). Further, in this embodiment, a period other than the period specified in the valid period in the above-mentioned V valid period setting process (S2109) is set as an invalid period (second period). Therefore, in this V invalid period setting process, it is confirmed whether the valid period is set, that is, whether the valid period is set. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the V timer that measures the passage of the V valid period by the countdown is set to "0" (that is, the state without the valid period). If the V timer is not "0", set the V timer to "0". It should be noted that the V timer may be set to "0", that is, set to a state without a valid period without confirming whether or not the V timer is "0". As a result, even if V is passed during the small hit game, if the game state before the start of the small hit game is the normal state, the game state after the end of the small hit game does not shift to the high probability state. In this embodiment, since the period other than the period specified in the valid period in the above-mentioned V valid period setting process (S2109) is the invalid period, the process of S2304 may be omitted.

If the second big winning opening 35 is open in S2302 (YES in S2302), the number of balls entered into the second big winning opening 35 during the two opening, that is, the game ball entered in the two opening. It is determined whether or not the total number of all balls has reached the specified maximum number of balls (10 in this embodiment) (S2306). If the specified number of balls has not been reached (NO in S2306), it is time to close the 2nd prize opening 35, that is, the predetermined opening time after opening the 2nd prize opening 35 (FIG. 6). (See) is determined whether or not it has passed (S2307). Then, if the opening time of the second large winning opening 35 has not elapsed (NO in S2307), the process is completed.

On the other hand, when the number of balls entered into the second large winning opening 35 during the two openings has reached the specified number of balls (YES in S2306), the second large winning opening 35 is closed (S2314). , Move to the small hit end processing of S2311. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 has elapsed (YES in S2307), the second big winning opening 35 is closed (S2308). Then, the value of the small hit open counter is decremented by 1 (S2309), and it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit open counter is "0" (S2310). If it is determined in S2310 that it is not "0" (NO in S2310), the process is terminated as it is in order to start the next opening.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2310 that it is "0" (YES in S2310), the process proceeds to the small hit end process of S2311. In S2311, as the small hit end process for ending the small hit game, the small hit ending command is set (S2311) and the small hit ending effect is started (S2312). Then, the small hit end flag is set (S2313), and the process is completed. The opening counter for small hits becomes "0" when the second large winning opening 35 is opened twice.

In S2301, if the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), since the opening of two times has been completed, it is determined whether or not the ending time of the small hit has elapsed (S2315), and the ending time. If has not passed (NO in S2315), the process ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned off (S2316), the small hit flag is turned off (S2317), and the special figure operation status is set to "1". Set (S2318) and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the special symbol standby processing (S1102) is executed again as the special symbol operation processing (S207).

At the start of the small hit game, the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are not switched from ON to OFF. Further, at the end of the small hit game, the game state setting process (S2121, FIG. 36) is not performed. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state is not changed before and after the execution of the small hit game. It can be said that the game control microcomputer 81 that executes the above special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109) functions as a "small profit special game execution means".

[Specific area sensor detection processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a specific area sensor detection process (S208) after the special figure operation process (S207). As shown in FIG. 36, in the specific area sensor detection process (S208), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a (S2401), and when it is determined that there is no detection (NO in S2401). ), End the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is detection in S2401 (YES in S2401), it is determined whether or not it is in the V valid period (S2402). The V valid period is a period set by the V valid period setting process (S2109) in the above-mentioned special electric accessory process 1 (S1108). In this embodiment, the V validity period is set to the first round and the second round in the jackpot game.

If it is determined by S2402 that the V is valid (YES in S2402), the V flag is turned ON (S2403), and whether or not the jackpot game currently being executed is a 2R jackpot (2R 4th jackpot). Is determined (S2404). Then, when it is determined that it is not a 2R jackpot (NO in S2404), that is, if it is a 15R jackpot, the first V pass command is set (S2405), and the process is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a 2R jackpot (YES in S2404), the second V passage command is set (S2406), and the process ends. The CPU of the main control board 80 transmits this V-passing command to the sub-control board 90 at a predetermined timing, and the sub-control board 90 executes a game effect in the effect symbol display area or the like according to the type of the received V-pass command. ..

If it is determined by S2402 that the V valid period is not in effect (NO in S2402), the third V passage command is set (S2407) without turning on the V flag, and the process ends. The first V passage command is a command for causing the sub control board 90 to perform V passage notification control. On the other hand, the second V-passing command and the third V-passing command are commands for preventing the sub-control board 90 from performing V-passing notification control in principle. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 is a means for switching the validity / invalidity of the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 by executing such a specific area sensor detection process (S208) or V validity period setting process (S2109). Functions as (specific area state switching means).

[Reserved ball count processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball number processing (S209) after the specific area sensor detection processing (S208). As shown in FIG. 37, in the reserved ball number processing (S209), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number and the special figure 2 reserved ball number stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81). Read the number of normal symbol reserved balls (S2501). Next, the data of the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls command for transmitting the reserved ball number information to the sub control board 90 or the like) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502). The data related to the number of reserved balls (reserved ball number command) is output by the output process (S201) in the next interrupt process (S105), and the data related to the number of reserved balls (reserved ball number command) is output for each interrupt process. Is set in the output buffer (S2502) and output processing (S201) is performed in sequence.

When the sub-control unit 90 that has received this hold ball number command determines that the number of special figure hold balls has increased or decreased based on the received hold ball number command, the display screen of the lower image display device 71 responds accordingly. The display contents of the effect hold display area (first effect hold display area 9c, second effect hold display area 9d) in 71a are updated. Specifically, for example, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 increases by 1 from "3" to "4", the first effect hold 9a corresponding to the increased number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 "4" is assigned. It is additionally displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c. Further, when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is reduced by 1 from "2" to "1" (that is, when the first special figure hold is exhausted), the left end of the first effect hold display area 9c (special figure 1 hold). The first effect hold 9a displayed in the location corresponding to the number of balls "1", see FIG. 3) is deleted, or the variable hold display area (not shown) is moved to display, and the display is accompanied by this. , The first effect hold 9a displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c is moved (shifted) by one to the left. On the other hand, the display contents of the second effect hold 9b (second special figure hold) can be updated in the same manner as in the first effect hold 9a (first special figure hold).

For the data of the number of special figure reserved balls when the number of special figure reserved balls is added, that is, the data of the number of special figure reserved balls accompanying the occurrence of the start entry (start winning), refer to the above-mentioned start entry command. It may be included, or a reserved ball number command indicating the number of reserved balls after addition (after starting ball entering) may be set in the output buffer together with the starting ball entering command. Further, for the data of the number of reserved balls when the number of reserved balls of the special figure is subtracted, that is, the data of the number of reserved balls of the special figure accompanying the start of change of the special symbol (digestion of the special figure hold), the above-mentioned fluctuation start command is used. It may be included or a hold ball number command indicating the number of special figure hold balls after subtraction (after special figure hold digestion) may be set in the output buffer together with the fluctuation start command.

[Power failure monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power cutoff monitoring process (S210) after the hold ball number process (S209). As shown in FIG. 38, in the power-off monitoring process (S210), first, it is determined whether or not a power-off signal is input (S2601), and if there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if there is an input of a power off signal (YES in S2601), the current state of the gaming machine (whether it is a probability change, whether it is a hit game, the number of reserved balls, the number of remaining fluctuations of the probability change / time reduction is some. Etc.) are stored in the RAM (S2602), the power off flag is turned on (S2603), and then loop processing is performed without returning to interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 48. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (effect control microcomputer 91). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub control board 90 reads out the program of the sub control main process shown in FIG. 39 from the ROM of the sub control board 90 and executes it. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, the CPU initialization process is first performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) and the like are set, and various flags, statuses and counters are reset.

Subsequently, the S4002 determines whether or not the power cutoff signal is ON and the content of the RAM of the sub control board 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) is normal (S4002). As a result, if the contents of the RAM are not normal (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub control board 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control) is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the contents of the RAM are normal (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub control board 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). That is, if the power cutoff signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power cutoff signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub control board 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control) is initially initialized. However, if the power off signal is turned on due to a power failure or the like, but the contents of the RAM are kept normal (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. Initializing the RAM resets the values of various flags, statuses and counters. It should be noted that the processes of S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (at the time of turning on the power), and are not executed after that. Further, in this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 also performs the same processing as the power supply cutoff monitoring process (S210) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. 11, and the power supply cutoff signal is turned on due to a power failure or the like. Then, the data related to the effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90. That is, the data related to the effect control when a power failure such as a power failure occurs is backed up. Therefore, unless the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003) when the power is turned on (when the power is restored) after the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like, the effect control by the effect control microcomputer 91 is performed. The state of is restored to the state before the power failure occurred.

The S4004 disables interrupts. Next, the random number seed update process is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various random number counters for determining the effect are updated. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (effect control microcomputer 91). The random numbers for determining the effect include a random number for determining the variable effect that determines the mode (variable effect pattern) of the effect pattern game effect to be executed, a random number for determining the advance notice effect that determines the advance notice effect, and an effect symbol determination that determines the effect symbol. There are random numbers etc. The random number update method can be the same as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. Instead of adding the random values by 1 at the time of updating, it may be added by 2 or the like. The random number for determining the effect is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, when a control signal (starting ball entry command) notifying that the starting ball has arrived is transmitted from the main control board 80, or a control signal notifying the start of fluctuation from the main control board 80 ( It can be used when a fluctuation start command) is transmitted, or when a fluctuation effect pattern, which will be described later, is determined. The storage location of the acquired random number for effect determination is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub control board 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control).

When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer (hereinafter, also referred to as “sub-output buffer”) in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control) are transmitted to the image control board. It is transmitted to 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. Each control board (each control unit) that received the command receives various effect devices (image display devices 71, 72, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, frame movable decorative member 13, and board movable decoration according to the received command. Various effects (effect pattern game effects, special game effects associated with big hit games and small hit games, etc.) are executed using the members 14 and the like). The effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently enables interrupts (S4007). After that, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While the interrupt is enabled, the receive interrupt process (S4008), the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, on the display screen of the image display device (effect symbol display area 7b, small effect symbol display area 8b, variation number display area 77, fourth symbol display area 78, effect hold display area, background). It is possible to control the display of the effect symbol 8, the small effect symbol 8a, the number of times image 77a, etc. in the display area), control the lighting of various lamps, control the operation of the movable decorative member, control the sound output from the speaker 67, and the like. It becomes.

[Receive interrupt processing]
In the reception interrupt processing (S4008), as shown in FIG. 40, whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is an external INT input of the effect control microcomputer 91. It is determined whether or not the input has been made to the unit (S4101). Then, when it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, when the S4101 determines that the strobe signal is ON (YES in the S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control). (S4102), the process is finished. This receive interrupt process (S4008) is a process that is executed in preference to other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 2 msec (hereinafter, “msec” is simply referred to as “ms”) is input to the sub-control board 90. As shown in FIG. 41, in the 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), first, input processing for creating switch data (edge data and level data) based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d is performed (S4201). .. Subsequently, a lamp data output process for outputting the lamp data created by the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later is performed (S4202). In the lamp data output processing (S4202), lamps such as the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 are turned on or off in a predetermined light emitting mode mainly along with the execution of various effects such as fluctuation effect, advance notice effect, and special game effect. When the lamp is made to emit light, the lamp data corresponding to the light emitting mode is output. Next, the drive data output process described later is performed to output the drive data created by the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later (S4203). In the drive data output process (S4203), the frame movable decorative member 13 and the board movable decorative member 14 are mainly driven in a predetermined drive mode (operation mode) in accordance with the execution of various effects such as the variable effect, the advance notice effect, and the special game effect. When the drive (operation) is performed, drive data corresponding to the drive mode is output, and the drive (operation) is related to the return operation for returning the effect movable body 13b to the initial position (origin) (return drive, A flag (return drive flag) that can be specified to be the first drive) is set. Then, a watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204). It can be said that the effect control microcomputer 91 that executes the lamp data output process (S4202) and the drive data output process (S4203) functions as a “drive execution means”.

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 10 ms is input to the sub control board 90. As shown in FIG. 42, in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, the drive limit process (S4301) and the receive command analysis process (S4302), which will be described later, are performed. Next, a switch state acquisition process (S4303) is performed in which the switch data created by the above-mentioned 2 ms timer interrupt process is stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) as the switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process. A switch process for setting the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data stored in the switch state acquisition process is performed (S4304). After that, other processing such as updating the random number for determining the effect is executed (S4305).

[Drive limit processing]
As shown in FIG. 43, in the drive limitation process (S4301), first, it is determined whether or not it is the time when the variation display of the special symbol is started (S4310). In other words, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 8). This determination can be made, for example, by confirming whether or not the fluctuation start command transmitted from the main control board 80 is received when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started. As a result, if it is determined that it is not the start time of the variable display (NO in S4310), this processing is completed without performing the processing after S4311, and if it is determined that it is the start time of the variable display (YES in S4310), it returns. It is determined whether or not the drive flag is ON (S4311).

Here, the return drive flag is switched ON / OFF by the drive data output process (S4203) described later. Specifically, as the drive data (frame drive data) for driving the frame movable decorative member 13, the drive data (return operation) for returning the effect movable body 13b in the operating state (protruding state) to the initial position (origin). It is turned on when the output of the drive data of the first drive mode is started, and is turned off when the output of the drive data is completed (that is, the end of the return operation). Therefore, when the return drive flag is ON, the drive status of the frame movable decorative member 13 (effect movable body 13b, electric drive source) becomes the drive data for the return operation (drive data of the first drive mode). Therefore, it means that the situation is driving (specific situation), that is, the return operation is in progress.

When it is determined in S4311 that the return drive flag is not ON (OFF) (NO in S4311), this process is completed without performing the process of S4312, and it is determined that it is ON (return operation is in progress). (YES in S4311), turn on the drive limit flag (S4312), and finish this process. The drive limit flag is a flag for setting a state (restricted state) in which the drive of a predetermined electric component is restricted among various electric components for production provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this embodiment, when setting various effect patterns (effect patterns) related to the variable effect, the advance notice effect, etc. in the variable effect start process (S4402) described later, the drive limit flag is referred to, and the drive limit is performed at that time. When the flag is ON, the drive of a predetermined electric component among the electric components for effect that can operate in accordance with the variation effect, the advance notice effect, or the like based on the effect pattern is restricted. Examples of the drive limiting mode (drive limiting mode) include setting a predetermined electric component to drive stop (unable to drive) (drive stop mode), reducing the drive amount and the number of drives of the predetermined electric component, and reducing the drive speed. For example, it is possible to use a drive mode (power saving drive mode) in which the vehicle is driven with less power than usual (unrestricted state). In this embodiment, the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) is an electric component (drive restriction target) whose drive can be restricted.

The drive limit flag turned ON in S4312 is the end of the fluctuation display that triggered the ON, that is, the end of the fluctuation display determined to be the time when the fluctuation display is started in S4310 (for example, reception of the fluctuation stop command). ) Is turned off. That is, it is possible to set a restricted state for one change display of a special symbol (in one change unit). As a result, when the variation display of the special symbol is started during the return operation, the power consumption of the game machine (electric component) is reduced by limiting the driving of the predetermined electrical component until the variation display ends. (Drive power amount) can be suppressed, and it is also possible to prevent the restricted state from being continuously set over a plurality of variable displays. It should be noted that the restriction state is released (the drive restriction flag is turned off) at the end of the variation display because the restriction on the drive of the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) is released during the variation display (during the variation effect). Therefore, the player may feel uncomfortable with respect to the change in the driving mode of the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) during the variable effect, that is, the sudden change in the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 (frame LED). This is to avoid. It can be said that the effect control microcomputer 91 that executes the above drive limiting process (S4301) functions as a “drive limiting means”.

[Received command analysis processing]
As shown in FIG. 44, in the reception command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not the start ball entry command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4395), and the start ball entry command has not been received. If it is determined (NO in S4395), the process shifts to S4401 processing, and if it is determined that the start entry command has been received (YES in S4395), the effect hold information storage process (S4400) is performed and the process shifts to S4401 processing. do. The effect hold information storage process (S4400) is a random process for determining the type of jackpot (preliminary judgment result, jackpot type determination) included in the start-in ball command (special figure 1 start-in ball command or special figure 2 start-in ball command) received in S4395. Game information such as numerical values and fluctuation pattern random values) according to the type of special symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) and the number of special symbol reserved balls when sending and receiving the start entry command (at the time of command generation). , It is stored in a predetermined effect hold information storage area of the RAM of the sub control board 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) in the shift memory format. For example, when the received start-in ball command is the special figure 1 start-in ball command corresponding to the reserved ball number "4" in the special figure 1, the pre-judgment result and the hit type included in the special figure 1 start-in ball command. Etc. are stored as the special figure 1 effect hold information in the area corresponding to the number of holds 4 in the special figure 1 effect hold information storage area. The effect hold information stored in this way can be used for executing various effects such as a variable effect, a notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The storage content (effect hold information) of the effect hold information storage area in the sub control board 90 is the special figure hold storage unit (first special figure hold storage unit, second special figure) in the main control board (main control unit) 80 described above. It matches the stored contents (acquired information) of the reserved storage unit). From this, it can be said that the effect holding information storage area of the sub control board 90 is also a “acquisition information storage means”.

Next, in S4401, it is determined whether or not the variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and when it is determined that the variation start command has been received (YES in S4401), the variation effect start process (YES) described later (S). S4402) is performed to shift to the processing of S4404, and if it is determined that the fluctuation start command has not been received (NO in S4401), the processing shifts to S4404 without performing the fluctuation effect start processing. In S4404, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4404), and if it is determined that a fluctuation stop command has been received (YES in S4404), the variation effect end processing (S4405) described later is performed. If it is determined that the fluctuation stop command has not been received (NO in S4404), the process shifts to the S4406 process without performing the fluctuation effect end process.

Subsequently, the S4406 determines whether or not a jackpot game-related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4406). Here, the jackpot game-related command is a command transmitted from the main control board 80 when executing the jackpot game, and in this embodiment, the opening command transmitted at the start of the jackpot game (occurrence of jackpot), The round start command sent at the start of the round, the round end command sent at the end of the round, and the ending command sent at the end of the jackpot game are applicable. The S4406 determines whether or not any of these jackpot game-related commands has been received, and if so (YES in S4406), determines whether or not the received jackpot game-related command is an opening command. (S4407). If it is an opening command (YES in S4407), reset (initialize) the fluctuation counter (S4408), perform jackpot game-related production processing (S4409), and if it is not an opening command (NO in S4407), reset the fluctuation counter. Performs jackpot game-related production processing (S4409) without (initializing). On the other hand, if the jackpot game-related command is not received from the main control board 80 (NO in S4406), the processing of S4412 (FIG. 45) without resetting the fluctuation counter (S4408) or performing the jackpot game-related effect processing (S4409). ).

Here, the fluctuation counter is a means (counting means) for counting the number of executions (variation display count) of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and in this embodiment, every time a fluctuation stop command from the main control board 80 is received. 1 is added to (for each stop display of the special symbol) in the variable effect end processing (S4405) described later. In this embodiment, the number of fluctuations displayed by the fluctuation counter is counted when the gaming state is a low base state. Therefore, the fluctuation display count counted by the fluctuation counter corresponds to the fluctuation display count of the first special symbol in principle. Then, the display (display of the variation display number) in the variation number display area 77 of the upper image display device 72 (display screen 72a) is performed based on the count value (count value) of the variation counter. ing. That is, it shows the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol in the low base state. In this embodiment, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed in the low base state (when the fluctuation stop command of the second special symbol is received), the fluctuation display is counted by the fluctuation counter. Therefore, it is targeted for displaying the variable display number of times by the number-of-times image 77a.

The trigger for resetting (initializing) the fluctuation counter is not limited to the reception of the opening command (that is, the start of the jackpot game), for example, the reception of the fluctuation stop command related to the jackpot fluctuation (stop display of the jackpot symbol), or It is also possible to receive the ending command (that is, the end of the big hit game). Further, in this embodiment, the fluctuation counter is reset (initialized) based on the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch) of the sub-control board 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control). It is supposed to be. Further, the trigger for updating the fluctuation counter (trigger for counting up) is not limited to the reception of the fluctuation stop command, but may be, for example, the reception of the fluctuation start command.

In the jackpot game-related effect processing (S4409), for example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening effect command that specifies an opening effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer. , If it is a round start command, set the round effect command that specifies the round effect according to the round specified based on the command in the sub output buffer, and if it is the ending command, the jackpot specified based on the command. Set the ending effect command that specifies the ending effect according to the type in the sub output buffer. When various effect commands related to these set jackpots are transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 immediately responds to the progress of the jackpot game based on the received commands. The effects related to the big hit game (big hit game related effects) such as the opening effect and the round effect are executed on the display screen of the image display device. It should be noted that the number image 77a (variable display number) is not displayed during the execution of the jackpot game-related effect.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 45, in S4412, it is determined whether or not the first V passage command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4412), and when it is determined that the first V passage command has been received (YES in S4412). ), Set the V passage notification command in the sub output buffer (4413), and shift to the processing of S4414. The first V passing command is a command from the main control board 80 to notify the sub control board 90 that the game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the V valid period in the 15R first and fifth big hits. .. When the V-passage notification command is transmitted to the image control board 100 (image control unit) or the like by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 reads predetermined image information from the ROM of the image control board 100. , Characters such as "V pass!" Are displayed on the display screen 71a of the lower image display device 71. As a result, the player is notified that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 and the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a high probability state. On the other hand, when it is determined in S4412 that the first V passage command has not been received (NO in S4412), the process proceeds to S4414 without setting the V passage notification command.

It should be noted that displaying the character "V passage!" Is one of the V passage notification modes, and other display contents (for example, displaying an object image imitating the character "V" or "probability change GET" is displayed. The passage of V may be notified by displaying the character of (such as displaying the character of). As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the game state after the big hit game (special game) being executed will be a high probability state. Further, the characters "V passage!" Or the like may be displayed on the display screen 72a of the upper image display device 72 to notify the V passage, and the display screen 71a of the lower image display device 71 and the display of the upper image display device 72 may be displayed. V passage notification may be performed using both of the screens 72a.

Subsequently, in the S4414, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the second V pass command (set by S2406) has been received from the main control board 80 (S4413), and determines that the second V pass command has not been received. If this is the case (NO in S4414), the process proceeds to S4415 and it is determined whether or not the 3V pass command has been received (S4415). Then, in both the case where it is determined that the second V passage command is received by S4414 (YES in S4414) and the case where it is determined that the third V passage command is received in S4415 (YES in S4415), the V passage is not notified. Set the command in the sub output buffer (S4416) and move to the processing of S4417. On the other hand, when it is determined in S4415 that the third V passage command has not been received (NO in S4415), the process proceeds to S4417 without setting the V passage non-notification command.

Here, the second V passing command is a command from the main control board 80 to notify the sub control board 90 that the game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the V valid period in the 2R 4th big hit. The third V passage command is a command from the main control board 80 to notify the sub control board 90 that the game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the V invalid period such as during a small hit.

When the V-passing non-notification command is transmitted to the image control board 100 or the like by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 passes through V such as "V-passing!" On the display screen of the image display device. Display control is performed on a screen that does not display characters to be notified. In other words, it is a V-passage non-notification mode. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if the gaming ball passes through the specific area 39 in the 2R 4th big hit or small hit, that is not notified to the player.

It should be noted that the command set in the above-mentioned specific area sensor detection process (S208) may be limited to the first V pass command, and the second V pass command and the third V pass command may not be set. In this case, the received command analysis process (S4302) does not execute the above-mentioned S4414 to S4416. Even with this configuration, the pachinko gaming machine can be configured to notify the player only when the V has passed during the V valid period in the 15R first and fifth jackpots. That is, it is not necessary to set a command (V-passage non-notification command) when the effect for notifying V-passage is not performed. However, it is possible to increase the stability of the image control by setting a command and controlling the image control board 100 based on the command as in the present embodiment.

Finally, the processing of S4417 is performed, and this processing is completed. In S4417, as other processing, processing based on other reception commands (for example, normal symbol fluctuation start command, normal symbol fluctuation stop command, game state specification command, etc.) other than the above-mentioned various commands is performed (S4417). Among the processes performed as other processes (S4417), the process based on the game state specification command is received in order to execute an effect corresponding to the game state (that is, the current game state) controlled by the main control side. There is a process of setting a flag (game status flag) corresponding to the game status specified by the game status specification command. Specifically, when the normal designation command is received, the normal status flag is turned ON, when the latency designation command is received, the latency status flag is turned ON, and when the time saving designation command is received, the time saving status flag is turned ON. , When the probability change specification command is received, the probability change state flag is turned ON. The effect control microcomputer 91 selects and sets (determines) the effect mode (mode status) and the variable effect pattern, which will be described later, based on the setting status of these game state flags. Further, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the normal designation command when the time saving state flag is ON, that is, the gaming state is changed from the time saving state (low accuracy high base state) to the normal state (low accuracy low base state). When shifting to, as another process (S4417), a process of turning on a specific flag is also performed. The specific flag is a specific period (predetermined period) after the gaming state shifts from the probability change state (high probability high base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state) to the normal state (low probability low base state). It is a flag indicating.

Here, in this embodiment, after the transition from the probability change state (high probability high base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state) to the normal state (low probability low base state) (after exiting the high base state). , The specific effect mode for a limited time is set until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 5 times. The specific effect mode is an effect mode different from the effect modes A to E described later, and a dedicated background image is displayed on the display screen during the specific effect mode. The specific effect mode is set immediately after exiting the high base state, even if the second special figure hold that occurred in the high base state still remains undigested and the low base state is reached. This is because there is a high possibility that the variable display of the second special symbol, which is more advantageous than the first special symbol, will be performed by the priority digestion of the special symbol hold. In addition, there is also the aim of preventing the player from stopping the game immediately after exiting the high base state (measures to prevent the connection). The setting process of the specific effect mode is also performed as another process (S4417).

[Variation production start processing]
Next, the variable effect start processing (S4402) executed by the reception command analysis processing (S4302) will be described. As shown in FIG. 46, in the variation effect start processing (S4402), first, in S4501, the effect control microcomputer 91 uses a random number for determining the variation effect, a random number for determining the advance notice effect, a random number for determining the effect symbol, and other random numbers for determining the effect. Performs random number processing (S4501) for determining the effect. In this embodiment, the processing of S4501 is performed at the timing when the fluctuation start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is acquired from each random number. Based on the acquired values, the mode of the effect symbol game effect to be executed, the advance notice effect, the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the like are determined.

Subsequently, in S4502, the effect control microcomputer 91 analyzes the fluctuation start command (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern specification command (information for designating a variation pattern) that specifies a variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The information for designating the variation pattern includes the variation pattern information (P1 to P24) shown in FIG. 9, the game state information for designating the current gaming state, the first special symbol hit / miss determination or the second special symbol hit / fail determination. The determination result of the above, the symbol information for designating the hit type, and the like are included (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are those corresponding to the first special symbol and those corresponding to the second special symbol in the fluctuation pattern designation command, by analyzing the fluctuation pattern designation command, the effect symbol game production to be started this time is performed. It is possible to determine whether the (variable display of the effect symbol) is related to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. It should be noted that these fluctuation pattern information, game state information, symbol information, and the like can also be used in processing other than the variation production start processing to be executed thereafter.

Subsequently, in S4503, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the effect mode to be executed, and is set based on the setting status of the game status flag described above (that is, the game status designation command from the main control board 80). In this embodiment, the mode status is determined by any value from "1" to "5", and each value is assigned to the effect modes A to E. The effect mode is a mode of effect in the image display device, and if the effect mode is different, a part or all of the effect mode of the game effect such as the advance notice effect and the reach effect is different. Specifically, the effect images displayed on the image display device, such as the characters, items, and background images that appear, can be made different, and the effect symbol game effect can also be executed in a manner corresponding to the effect mode. can. Further, when a plurality of game effects (notice effect, reach effect, etc.) are provided, different game effects may be executed depending on the effect mode.

In this embodiment, the effect mode A (mode status 1) is executed when the low accuracy low base state is controlled, and the effect mode B (mode status 2) is controlled when the low accuracy high base state is controlled. It is executed, and the effect mode C (mode status 3) is executed when it is controlled to the high accuracy and high base state. Therefore, by confirming which of the production modes A to C, the player can grasp the current gaming state. Further, the effect mode D (mode status 4) and the effect mode E (mode status 5) are executed when the high accuracy low base state or the low accuracy low base state is controlled. Therefore, when the effect mode is D or E, even if the player confirms the effect mode, he / she can grasp whether the probability state of the special symbol winning / failing determination is in the high probability state or the low probability state (normal state). It's difficult to do. In that sense, the effect modes D and E can be said to be non-notification modes (latent modes).

Here, in this embodiment, after the end of the big hit game related to the 15R 1st big hit and the 15R 5th big hit, the effect mode C is set, and after the end of the big hit game related to the 15R 2nd big hit and the 15R 6th big hit, the effect mode B is set. After the end of the big hit game related to the 15R 3rd big hit, the effect mode A is set, and after the end of the big hit game related to the 2R 4th big hit, and after the end of the small hit game related to the 1st small hit and the 2nd small hit. The effect mode is D or E. Further, even when the control is performed in the low accuracy low base state, as described above, after the high accuracy high base state or the low accuracy high base state ends and the low accuracy low base state is reached (high base). During a predetermined period (after exiting the state) (until the variation display of the special symbol is performed 5 times in this example), the effect mode becomes the specific effect mode. It should be noted that the number of times the variation of the special symbol that determines the execution period of the specific effect mode does not have to be 5 times, for example, it is set to "4 times" which is equal to the upper limit of the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 or is more than 5 times ( For example, 10 times, etc.). Further, the number of times may be determined by lottery or the like each time the high base state is exited, and may be variable. Further, it may be determined by the time (elapsed time, timer) instead of the number of fluctuation display of the special symbol.

Subsequently, in the S4504, a variation (not shown) for determining an execution pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect by the image display devices 71, 72, the board lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, the movable decorative member, etc. controlled by the effect control microcomputer 91. Set the production pattern determination table (S4504). Specifically, the variation effect pattern determination table to be used is set based on the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 and the variation pattern specification command received from the main control unit 80. For example, when the variation pattern information specified by the received variation pattern specification command is "P1 (variation pattern P1)" (see FIG. 9), the variation effect pattern determination table is used as a hit time corresponding to the current effect mode. The variable effect pattern determination table is set. In this embodiment, a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables corresponding to the effect mode (mode status) are stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 in advance. Therefore, in the S4504, the variable effect pattern determination tables are selected from among them. The table corresponding to the mode status (current production mode) referenced in S4503 is selected and set. The variation effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the variation mode of the effect symbol (the mode of the effect symbol game effect), and a plurality of variation effect pattern determination tables are stored in advance in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. There is. In S4504, one of the plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables is set.

Subsequently, in S4505, a variation effect pattern suitable for the specified variation pattern is selected and set based on the variation effect determination random number acquired in S4501 and the variation effect pattern determination table set in S4504 (S4505). .. As the variation effect pattern, the variation mode of the effect symbol 8 displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b (execution mode of the effect symbol game effect) is set. As a result, in the effect symbol game effect (variable effect), when the reach effect is executed (variable effect with reach), when the character effect performed using a predetermined character is executed (variable effect with character), the ally character ("variable effect with character"). When executing a battle effect that expresses the confrontation scene between a character (also called an "ally character") and an enemy character (also called an "enemy character") (variable effect with battle), or when neither the reach effect, the character effect, nor the battle effect is executed. (Variable production without reach) etc. are decided.

Here, the reach effect means that, for example, as a display mode of the effect symbol 8 when the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit, all three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are the same (doublet). When the mode (big hit mode, specific mode) is provided, two of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) with the symbols constituting the big hit mode, and the remaining one is a variable display. Refers to an effect indicating whether or not the remaining one is stopped and displayed with a symbol that completes the jackpot mode (see FIG. 52). It should be noted that, after the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 8, the stop (temporary stop) of the two effect symbols (in this embodiment, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R) at the same number (design) is also referred to as "reach establishment". say.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the variation mode (variation effect pattern) of the effect symbol 8, reach A, reach B, reach C, super reach (also referred to as “SP reach”) A, super reach B, and super Reach C and battle effects are set, and in S4505, which of these effects is performed based on the variable effect pattern determination table, or these effects are not performed (this is also called "normal variable effect"). ) Is determined. Then, when the variation effect with reach is executed, one of the reach effects is set based on the variation pattern designation command and the variation effect pattern determination table. Here, when the super reach effect is executed as the effect symbol game effect, it is set so that the possibility of a big hit is higher than the case where the normal reach effect is executed. That is, it can be said that the super reach effect is a game effect with higher reliability (possibility of becoming a big hit) than the reach (normal reach) effect. In addition, the super reach production includes a development production (also referred to as "development SP reach") in which the reach production continues (develops) by pretending to be off during the reach production, and a development production that does not include the development production ("development SP reach"). (Also referred to as "normal SP reach") exists, and the development SP reach is set so that the jackpot reliability is higher than that of the normal SP reach. When the normal reach effect and the super reach effect are compared, the effect modes from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 8 to the establishment of the reach (stop of the second symbol) are basically the same. In this embodiment, the reach effect is mainly set (executed) when a variation pattern designation command for specifying a variation pattern (see FIG. 9) with a variation time of 30,000 ms or more is received. That is, the presence or absence of reach effect is determined by the selection of the variation pattern of the special symbol performed in the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81), and the variation pattern of the special symbol is "variation pattern with reach". "And" variation pattern without reach "will exist.

Further, in this embodiment, the battle effect is a dedicated effect in the high accuracy and high base state (right-handed game state), and the reach effect is not executed in the high accuracy and high base state. For this reason, in the processing of the S4505 in the high accuracy and high base state, the presence / absence of execution of the battle effect and the battle effect pattern when the battle effect is executed are determined (selected) based on the variation effect pattern determination table for the probability change state. During the variable display of the effect symbol in the high accuracy and high base state, normally, the pre-battle effect indicating whether or not the battle effect is started is performed on the display screen (effect symbol display area 7b) of the image display device. There is. As the effect before the start of the battle, for example, it is possible to display an effect depicting the situation until the ally character encounters the enemy character. Then, the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination is any of 15R 1st jackpot, 15R 2nd jackpot, 15R 5th jackpot and 15R 6th jackpot, and any of the fluctuation patterns P1, P2, P13 and P14 (FIG. 9). When the variable display of the special symbol based on (see) is executed (started), the ally character encounters the enemy character from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol accompanying this to the stop (temporary stop) of the second stop symbol. A scene indicating whether or not to start the confrontation between the two is displayed, and then a scene indicating the start of the confrontation is displayed according to the stop (temporary stop) of the second stop symbol, and the battle effect is started. In the high-accuracy and high-base state, the big hit is confirmed by the start of this battle production. That is, when a variation pattern designation command for specifying a jackpot variation pattern (see FIG. 9) having a variation time of 45,000 ms or more is received, a battle effect is set (executed). Therefore, there are "variable pattern with battle" and "variable pattern without battle" in the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the former is the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the 15R jackpot, and the latter is the 2R jackpot, small hit or miss. It becomes the corresponding fluctuation pattern.

In addition, since the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is mainly performed in the high base state, as a result of the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct in the high accuracy high base state, the first special symbol such as the 15R first jackpot or the 15R second jackpot is used. Corresponding hits are rarely obtained. Further, in the high-accuracy and high-base state, when the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is out of order, most of the short fluctuations have a fluctuation time of 2000 ms, but sometimes an out-of-order fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 3000 ms or more is selected (Fig.). 9). In this regard, when the variation display of the special symbol based on the deviation variation pattern of 3000 ms or more is executed, the ally character is the enemy from the start of the variation display of the effect symbol accompanying this to the stop (temporary stop) of the second stop symbol. A scene showing whether or not to encounter a character and start a confrontation between the two is displayed, and then a scene in which the enemy character disperses without starting the confrontation between the two is displayed according to the stop (temporary stop) of the second stop symbol. By doing so, it is supposed to indicate that the deviation is confirmed. In addition, from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol to the stop (temporary stop) of the second stop symbol, the effect of displaying a scene showing whether or not the ally character encounters the enemy character and starts the confrontation between the two. Also known as "battle fanning production".

In addition, in the battle production, a production display depicting a scene in which a ally character and an enemy character confront each other is displayed on the display screen. Then, by winning the ally character (battle production of the winning pattern), it is shown that the big hit confirmed by the start of the battle production is the "big hit scheduled to pass V", and by defeating the ally character (battle production of the losing pattern), the battle is concerned. It indicates that the jackpot confirmed by the start of the production is the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". In other words, the battle effect corresponding to the 15R 1st jackpot and the 15R 5th jackpot (V passing planned jackpot) becomes a "winning pattern", and the battle effect corresponding to the 15R 2nd jackpot and the 15R 6th jackpot (V non-passing scheduled jackpot). Is a "losing pattern". And, the battle victory means the continuation of the probable change, and the defeat of the battle means the end of the probable change (time saving rush).

Further, in the battle effect of the winning pattern, the frame movable decorative member 13 is driven (operated) according to the timing of displaying the scene of the victory of the ally character, and the effect movable body 13b is made to appear. .. By driving the frame movable decorative member 13 (appearance of the effect movable body 13b), the battle victory (probability change continuation) is enlivened and the game entertainment is enhanced. Further, the frame movable decorative member 13 (directing movable body 13b) that has been in the operating state (second state) due to the battle victory is in the operating state (second state) even during the subsequent big hit game (15R big hit game). ) Is kept. Then, the end condition of the frame movable effect is satisfied with the start of the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game, and based on the establishment of the end condition, the frame movable decorative member 13 (effect movable body 13b) in the operating state is , The return operation of driving the effect movable body 13b in the mode of returning to the initial position (origin) (first drive mode) is performed. That is, the frame movable decorative member 13 (effect movable body 13b) is driven in the first drive mode by receiving the fourth ending command A from the above-mentioned main control unit 80, and the return operation is performed by this.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, "development SP reach" and "normal SP reach" are provided as super reach effects (SP reach A to C), but the development SP reach is further framed. The "frame movable development SP reach" driven (operated) by the movable decorative member 13, the "board movable development SP reach" driven (operated) by the board movable decorative member 14, the frame movable decorative member 13 and the board movable decoration A "non-movable development SP reach" in which none of the members 14 is driven (operated) is provided. The development SP reach with movable frame is set so that the jackpot reliability is higher than the development SP reach with movable board, and the development SP reach with movable board is the jackpot reliability compared to the development SP reach without movement. The degree is set to be high. In addition, in the "developed SP reach with movable board", one of the movable board decorative members 14L, 14C, 14R is driven (operated), two are driven (operated) at the same time, and three are the same. There is a pattern that drives (operates) at the same time, and in the development SP reach with movable board, all (three) of the movable board decorative members 14L, 14C, 14R are driven (operated) at the same time. The jackpot reliability is the highest, and the jackpot reliability is set to be lower in the order of two patterns that are driven (operated) at the same time and one that is driven (operated).

Here, in the "frame movable development SP reach" and "board movable development SP reach", the timing at which the movable decorative member in the initial state is driven (operated) (the start timing of the effect operation) is the SP reach effect. It is the timing (the start timing of the development production) that the reach production continues (development) by pretending to be off. On the other hand, the return operation in which the frame movable decorative member 13 (effect movable body 13b) is driven (operated) to enter an operating state and then the effect movable body 13b is returned to the initial position (origin) is the SP reach. It is performed at the end of the variation effect (variation display of the effect pattern) accompanied by. Further, after the board movable decorative member 14 (14L, 14C, 14R) is driven (operated) and appears on the front side of the display screen 71a, the board movable decorative member 14 (14L, 14C, 14R) is set to the initial position (origin). The return operation driven in the mode of returning to) is performed immediately after the SP reach advances to the development effect (after the start of the development effect). This is to make it possible to visually recognize the contents of the development effect developed on the display screen. In this embodiment, the frame movable decorative member 13 and the board movable decorative member 14 do not perform the effect operation (movement from the initial position to the operation position) at the same time, that is, the frame movable effect (frame effect). The specifications are such that the operation) and the board movement effect (board effect operation) are not performed at the same time. This is to prevent the time when the power consumption (driving power) of the electric parts included in the gaming machine becomes excessive as much as possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the above-mentioned "battle fanning effect" is performed in the high accuracy and high base state, the board movable decorative member 14C can operate from the beginning of the variable effect. In this case, the movable board decorative member 14C does not completely appear on the front side of the display screen, but only a few small movements with a small driving amount (movement amount) to move back and forth from the initial position are repeated. It has become. Such small movements (here, vertical movements) of the movable board decorative member 14C are also referred to as "fanning movements". Whether or not such a fanning motion is executed is determined based on the variable effect pattern determination table related to the battle effect. It is also possible to drive (operate) the board movable decorative member (14L, 14R) other than the board movable decorative member 14C as a fanning operation. In this case, it is possible to drive one of the panel movable decorative members 14L, 14C, 14R, drive two, or drive all three.

In S4505, the fluctuation effect patterns such as the above normal variation effect, reach effect, battle effect, etc. are selected and set. Further, in the S4505, the lamps (LEDs) such as the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 are made to emit light in a light emitting mode according to the variable effect pattern (that is, the selected variable effect pattern) set in the S4505 (light emission effect). (To be performed), the fluctuation effect lamp data is created, and this is stored in the RAM (lamp data output buffer) of the sub control board 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) as lamp data for 2 ms timer interrupt processing. The stored lamp data is output by the lamp data output process (S4202) at the timing corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern, so that the drive (light emission) control of the board lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, etc. can be adjusted according to the progress of the variation effect. It is done. Here, when creating the lamp data for variable effect, the return drive flag is referred to as described above, and if the return drive flag is OFF, the lamp data for the unrestricted state (normal) without limitation is created. On the other hand, when the return drive flag is ON, that is, when the frame movable decorative member 13 is in the return operation, lamp data for a restricted state that limits light emission (drive) of the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) is created. do.

In this embodiment, the restriction mode (restriction method) when the drive of the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) is restricted differs depending on the gaming state. Specifically, the restriction mode when the gaming state is a gaming state (low base state, low accuracy high base state) other than the high accuracy high base state is defined as the left frame LED substrate 66L located on the left and right of the front frame 51 and the right. It is a drive stop mode (also referred to as a "first restriction mode") in which all light emission (drive) of the LEDs mounted on the frame LED substrate 66R is stopped. On the other hand, in the limited mode when the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state, the light emission (driving) of some of the LEDs mounted on the left frame LED board 66L and the right frame LED board 66R is stopped. It is a power-saving driving mode (also referred to as a "second limiting mode"). The power-saving driving mode of this embodiment is the left first region L1 to the left fourth region L4 of the left lens cover portion of the front frame 51 shown in FIG. 1, and the right first region R1 to the right first region of the right lens cover portion. Of the four regions R4 (out of a total of eight regions), it corresponds to the four regions (lower half region) of the left third region L3, the left fourth region L4, the right first region L1 and the right fourth region R4. The light emission (drive) of the LED is stopped, and the LED corresponding to the other four remaining areas (upper half area) is made to emit light (drive) without limitation. In this way, the image display device of the present embodiment has a configuration in which light emission (driving) in the lower half region is stopped and light emission (drive) is performed in the upper half area without limitation. This is because the images are arranged side by side and the player's line of sight is relatively easy to face upward. Therefore, during the game, the lower half area of the lens cover portion of the front frame 51 is the upper half area. This is because it is harder for the player to see.

Therefore, when the frame movable decorative member 13 is in the return operation at the timing when the variation display of the identification information (special symbol, effect symbol) is started in the low base state or the low accuracy high base state, the variation effect lamp data. As a result, data (light-off data) that does not cause the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) to emit light (drive) at all is created, and this is the RAM (lamp) of the sub-control board 90 (production control microcomputer 91) as lamp data for 2 ms timer interrupt processing. It is stored in the data output buffer). In this case, the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) does not emit light in accordance with the fluctuation display (variation effect). On the other hand, when the frame movable decorative member 13 is in the return operation at the timing when the variation display of the identification information (special symbol, effect symbol) is started in the high accuracy and high base state, the frame lamp is used as the variation effect lamp data. Data (power saving data) that causes a part of 66 (frame LED) to emit light (drive) is created, and this is RAM (lamp data) of the sub control board 90 (production control microcomputer 91) as lamp data for 2 ms timer interrupt processing. It is stored in the output buffer). In this case, a part of the frame lamp 66 (LED corresponding to four areas out of eight areas of the lens cover portion) emits light in a light emitting mode according to the variation effect pattern in accordance with the variation display (variation effect). do.

In this way, when the frame movable decorative member 13 is in the return operation at the change start timing of the identification information (special symbol, effect symbol), it is the frame movable that limits the driving of all or part of the frame lamp 66. When the variable display of the special symbol is newly started during the return operation of the decorative member 13 (effect movable body 13b), the board lamp 5 (board LED) and the board can be moved without limiting the drive of the frame lamp 66. When the decorative member 14 or the like operates, the amount of electric power (driving electric energy) consumed for driving the electric parts of the game machine exceeds the permissible range, and various electric parts, power supply boards, etc. constituting the game machine are used. This is because there is a risk of causing damage or failure. In particular, in this embodiment, as will be described later, it is produced as a notice effect pattern of the fluctuation notice in a low base state (no low probability time reduction, no high probability time reduction) or a low probability high base state (with low probability time reduction). It is provided with a "board movable accessory notice" in which the board movable decorative member 14 is driven (operated) with the start of the variable display of the symbol 8. For this reason as well, there is a possibility that the amount of drive power will be temporarily excessive at the start of the variable display. On the other hand, in the high-accuracy and high-base state, such a "board movable accessory notice" is not performed, and the board movable decorative member 14 can be driven (operated) at the beginning of the fluctuation by one board. Since it is only a fanning operation with a small drive amount by the movable decorative member 14C, it is unlikely that the drive power amount will be excessive at the start of fluctuation as compared with the low base state and the low accuracy high base state. ..

Here, in this embodiment, as described above, the frame movable effect is performed at the start of the development effect during SP reach, and the frame movable effect is performed at the time of displaying the ally character victory scene during the battle effect (probability change continuation confirmation). In the former case, the frame movable decorative member 13 (effect movable body 13b) is returned with the end of the variable effect accompanied by the SP reach, and in the latter case, the jackpot is executed through the battle effect. With the end of the game (start of the ending effect), the return operation of the frame movable decorative member 13 (effect movable body 13b) is performed. Further, as described above, the time required for the return operation of the frame movable decorative member 13 (effect movable body 13b) is 5.5 seconds (5500 ms), and the stop display time (confirmed display time) of the special symbol is 0.6. Seconds (600 ms). Therefore, in any case, the variable display of the special symbol can be newly started during the return operation of the frame movable decorative member 13 (effect movable body 13b).

Under such a configuration (specification), in order to avoid the risk as described above, the next special figure variation display (variation effect) is displayed until the return operation of the frame movable decorative member 13 (effect movable body 13b) is completed. It is conceivable to adopt a configuration that does not start anew, but in this case, it is not a good idea because it may hinder the smooth progress of the game. Further, it is conceivable to increase the capacity of the power supply board (power supply unit) or to eliminate the board movable effect in which the board movable decorative member 14 is driven (operated) at the beginning of the fluctuation to simplify the effect. In this case, it is not a good idea because it causes an increase in product cost and a decrease in production effect. In this respect, as in the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol is started during the return operation of the frame movable decorative member 13 (effect movable body 13b), the drive of the frame lamp 66 can be restricted. It is possible to prevent the amount of power consumption (driving power amount) from becoming excessive, and it is possible to avoid interfering with the production and other games.

It should be noted that the frame movable effect is performed at the start of the development effect during the SP reach, and the return operation of the frame movable decorative member 13 (effect movable body 13b) is performed with the end of the variable effect accompanying the SP reach (frame movable and development SP reach). If the variation effect is a jackpot variation, the opening period is started after the variation effect is completed. Since the opening period (opening time) is 8 seconds (8000 ms) as described above, in this case, the return operation (5.5 seconds) of the frame movable decorative member 13 (directing movable body 13b) is completed during the opening period. Will be done. Here, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the board movable decorative member 14 does not drive (operate) the effect (opening effect) during the opening period. Therefore, even if the opening period is started during the return operation of the frame movable decorative member 13, the possibility that the power consumption amount (driving power amount) becomes excessive is extremely low (equal to zero). From this, in this embodiment, when the next variation display is started after the variation effect of "frame movable development SP reach" is completed (when the board movable effect can be executed), the frame lamp 66 When the big hit game (special game state) is started (when the board movable effect is not executed), the restricted state is not set. As a result, it is possible to avoid setting the restricted state unnecessarily, and to secure the effect of the opening effect when the big hit game is started.

Further, in the S4505, when the variable effect pattern set in the S4505 is a pattern including the drive (operation) of the movable decorative member (frame movable decorative member 13, board movable decorative member 14), the variable effect is driven (operation). Drive data for variable effect of the movable decorative member to be moved is created, and this is stored in the RAM (drive data output buffer) of the sub control board 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control) as drive data for 2 ms timer interrupt processing. The stored drive data is output by the drive data output process (S4203) at the timing corresponding to the variation effect pattern, so that the drive (operation) control of the movable decorative member is performed according to the progress of the variation effect.

Further, in S4505, the effect symbol (also referred to as “stop effect symbol”) to be stopped and displayed is determined and set based on the random number for determining the effect symbol acquired in S4501 and the stop symbol determination table (not shown). Production symbol The production symbol that is stopped and displayed as a result of the game production is an odd number of symbols such as "777" when the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is the 15R 1st and 5th big hits (that is, the big hits scheduled to pass V). In the case of 15R second, third, and sixth big hits (that is, big hits scheduled to not pass through V), they are doublet with an even number such as "666". In addition, when one of the three production symbols such as "787" is out of reach, one of the three production symbols is different from the other production symbols, and when it is out of reach, three productions such as "635" are produced. At least one of the symbols is selected so that the other effect symbols are different from each other. Further, in the case of a 2R 4th big hit or a small hit, a predetermined chance eye such as "135" or a dedicated symbol such as "3 ☆ 3" may be stopped and displayed. That is, the same effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the time of the 2R 4th big hit and at the time of the small hit. Therefore, the player cannot determine whether the 2R 4th big hit or the small hit is obtained only by checking the stopped display of the effect symbol. The above-mentioned stop display mode (display result of variable display) of the effect symbol 8 is an example, and what is stopped and displayed as the stop effect symbol according to the result of the special symbol hit / miss determination can be appropriately changed.

Next, in S4506, the advance notice effect setting process related to the setting of the advance notice effect is performed (S4506). In this embodiment, various notice effects such as a notice effect based on the preliminary judgment result (holding look-ahead notice) and a notice effect related to the current special figure fluctuation display (variation effect) (the change notice) can be executed. Therefore, in S4506, the execution pattern (notice effect pattern) of the advance notice effect including whether or not to execute (execution / non-execution) is set for each advance notice effect. Specifically, random numbers related to the advance notice effect such as the random number for the advance notice effect acquired in S4501, the advance notice effect pattern determination table (not shown) stored in the ROM of the sub control board 90, and the storage of the effect hold information storage area. Based on the content (effect hold information) and the like, the advance notice effect pattern is determined and set including whether or not the advance notice effect is executed.

In this embodiment, the effect pattern is used as the advance notice effect pattern of the variation announcement related to the execution of the variation effect in the low base state (no low probability time reduction, no high probability time reduction) and the low probability high base state (with low probability time reduction). The drive (operation) of the board movable decorative member 14 (14L, 14C, 14R) is started with the start of the variation display of 8, and the drive (operation) is ended at the stop (temporary stop) timing of the first stop symbol. "Notice of movable board" is provided. The notice of the movable board is the first notice of the movable board, which drives one of the movable board decorative members 14L, 14C, 14R, and the first notice of the movable board, which drives two of the movable board decorative members 14L, 14C, 14R. There is a two-board movable accessory notice and a third board movable accessory notice that drives three (all) of the board movable decorative members 14L, 14C, and 14R. In S4506, it is determined which of the 1st to 3rd board movable accessory notices is given or whether or not these notices are given based on the notice effect pattern determination table. Further, when the first board movable accessory notice or the second board movable accessory notice is given, the board movable decorative member to be driven is also determined. In the high-probability high-base state (low probability time reduction, high probability time reduction), the board movable decorative member 14 does not give notice of the board movable accessory. This is because, as described above, in the high-accuracy and high-base state, the big hit is confirmed by the start of the battle effect, and the fanning operation may be performed with the execution of the battle fanning effect.

Further, also in S4506, in order to make lamps such as the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 emit light in a light emitting mode according to the notice effect pattern (that is, the selected notice effect pattern) set in the S4506 (to perform the light emission effect). ) Is created, and this is stored in the RAM (lamp data output buffer) of the sub-control board 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) as lamp data for 2 ms timer interrupt processing. The stored lamp data is output by the lamp data output process (S4202) at the timing corresponding to the advance notice effect pattern, so that the drive (light emission) control of the board lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, etc. is adjusted to the progress of the advance notice effect. It is done. Here, when creating the lamp data for the advance notice effect, the return drive flag is referred to as in the case of creating the lamp data for the variable effect described above, and if the return drive flag is OFF, the lamp data for the non-restricted state is created. Is created, and if the return drive flag is ON (the frame movable decorative member 13 is in the return operation), lamp data for the restricted state is created. Further, the mode of limiting the driving of the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) in the advance notice effect is the same as in the case of the above-mentioned variable effect, and it is also the same in that it differs depending on the gaming state.

Further, in the S4506, when the notice effect pattern set in the S4506 is a pattern including the drive (operation) of the board movable decorative member 14, that is, when the pattern includes the "board movable accessory notice", the notice effect pattern The drive data for the advance notice effect of the movable decorative member 14 (14L, 14C, 14R) to be driven (operated) is created based on the above, and the sub control board 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control) is used as the drive data for the 2 ms timer interrupt process. ) RAM (drive data output buffer). The stored drive data is output by the drive data output process (S4203) at the timing corresponding to the advance notice effect pattern, so that the drive (operation) control of the movable decorative member 14 is the advance notice effect (notice of the movable board). It is done according to the progress.

It should be noted that the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment specified by the analysis result of the change start command in S4502, that is, the result of the hit / fail judgment (big hit judgment) related to the special figure change display this time (big hit or miss), and the change start as well. The change pattern information of the special symbol specified by the analysis result of the command, that is, the change pattern related to the special figure change display this time, the notice effect pattern set in S4506, that is, the type (notice type) of the advance notice effect to be executed. The mode, the presence or absence of the advance notice, etc. will be different. In addition, when executing a notice effect, one of a plurality of notice effects (one type of notice effect) may be performed, or two or more notice effects (multiple types of notice effects) may be combined. That is, a plurality of types of advance notice effects may be performed at each execution timing during one variation display (during variation effect).

Next, in S4507, a variable effect start command for starting an effect symbol game effect (variable display of the effect symbol, reach effect, advance notice effect, etc.) based on the variable effect pattern set in S4505 and the advance notice effect pattern set in S4506. Is set in the sub output buffer (S4507), and the variation effect start processing is completed. When the variation effect start command set in S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 uses the variation effect pattern specified based on the variation effect start command, that is, S4505. The predetermined variation effect image data corresponding to the variation effect pattern set in, and the advance notice effect pattern specified based on the variation effect start command, that is, the predetermined advance notice effect image corresponding to the advance notice effect pattern set in S4506. The data is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the variation effect, the advance notice effect, and the like based on the read image data are executed on the display screen of the image display device. Further, the small effect symbol 8a and the fourth symbol are variablely displayed on the display screen 72a of the second image display device 72.

[Fluctuating production end processing]
Next, the variable effect end processing (S4407) executed by the reception command analysis processing (S4302) will be described. As shown in FIG. 47, in the variation effect end processing (S4407), first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the low base state (low probability low base state or high probability low base state) (S4601). If not (NO in S4601), the process proceeds to the process of S4609 described later, and if so (YES in S4601), it is determined whether or not the specific flag is OFF (S4602). As described above, the specific flag is turned on when the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state, and while the specific flag is ON, the effect mode becomes the specific effect mode. .. Then, when it is determined that the specific flag is OFF (YES in S4602), that is, when the gaming state is in the low base state and not after the high base state is exited, the fluctuation counter is added by 1 (S4603), and the second 1 Set the variable effect end command in the sub output buffer (S4604).

The first variable effect end command is a command for stopping and displaying the effect symbols (effect symbol 8, small effect symbol 8a, and fourth symbol), and is information indicating the count value of the fluctuation counter after 1 addition with S4603. Is included. When this first variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 stops and displays the effect symbol that has been variablely displayed on the display screen of the image display device. Then, the variation effect (effect symbol game effect) is terminated, and the variation display number displayed in the variation number display area 77 is displayed according to the count value of the variation counter. As a result, the variation display number (number image) on the variation number display area 77 is additionally displayed by 1 each time the variation display of the special symbol (in principle, the variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the low base state. (Count-up display).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S4602 that the specific flag is ON (NO in S4602), the specific fluctuation counter is incremented by 1 (S4605). As described above, when the gaming state becomes the low base state due to the exit from the high base state, the specific flag is turned ON, and the effect mode is in the specific effect mode until the variation display of the special symbol is performed five times. In response to this, in S4605, a specific fluctuation counter that determines the execution period of the specific effect mode is added by 1. Then, in the subsequent S4606, it is determined whether or not the value of the specific fluctuation counter is "5" (S4606), and if not (NO in S4606), the process proceeds to the processing of S4609 described later, and if so, (YES in S4606), reset (initialize) the specific fluctuation counter (S4607), set the specific effect mode end command in the sub output buffer (S4608) to end the specific effect mode, and process S4609. Transition. When the specific effect mode end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 displays an image such as a background for the specific effect mode on the display screen of the image display device. Performs processing for displaying an image (effect mode A) for a low-accuracy low-base state (normal state).

In S4609, the second variable effect end command is set in the sub output buffer (S4609). The second variable effect end command is a command for stopping and displaying the effect symbols (effect symbol 8, small effect symbol 8a, and fourth symbol) like the first variable effect end command, but the count value of the fluctuation counter is set. It does not include the information shown. When the second variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 stops and displays the effect symbol that has been variablely displayed on the display screen of the image display device. Then, the variable production (production design game production) is completed.

[Drive data output processing]
Next, the drive data output process (S4203) executed by the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) will be described. As shown in FIG. 48, in the drive data output process (S4203), first, the drive data (board drive data) of the board movable decorative member 14 that can be created at the time of setting the previous variation effect pattern and the advance notice effect pattern (S4505, S4506). ) Is stored in the drive data output buffer (S4701). The board drive data is created for each of the three board movable decorative members 14L, 14C, and 14R, and is the board drive data for the effect operation of driving (operating) from the initial position to the operation position (second drive mode). The panel drive data) and the panel drive data for the return operation (panel drive data of the first drive mode) for driving (operating) from the operation position to the initial position exist. In the above-mentioned S4505 and S4506, the effect pattern to be set is a pattern including the board movable effect in which the board movable decorative member 14 is driven (operated) (board movable development SP reach, battle fanning effect, board movable character notice, etc.). If there is, drive data (board drive data) related to a series of operations from the start to the end of the board movable effect is created and stored in the drive data output buffer. In S4701, it is determined whether or not those board drive data are stored.

If it is determined by S4701 that the board drive data is not stored (NO in S4701), the process proceeds to S4704 without performing the process (S4702, S4703) for driving (operating) the board movable decorative member 14. If it is determined that the data is stored (YES in S4701), it is determined whether or not it is the output time of the stored panel drive data (S4702). The output timing of the board drive data is determined based on the variable effect pattern and the advance notice effect pattern that triggered the creation of the board drive data. In other words, it is determined according to the execution pattern of the board movable effect included in the variable effect pattern set in S4505 and the advance notice effect pattern set in S4506. In S4702, it is determined whether or not it is the output time based on the execution pattern (variable effect pattern, notice effect pattern) of the board movable effect.

If the S4702 determines that it is time to output the board drive data (YES in S4702), it outputs the target board drive data (S4703), proceeds to the processing of S4704, and determines that it is not the output time of the board drive data. If this is the case (YES in S4702), the panel movable decorative member 14 is scheduled to be driven, but it is not yet the driving time, so the process proceeds to S4704 without outputting the panel drive data (S4703). By the output of the panel drive data by the S4703, the panel movable decorative member to be driven is driven (operated) in the drive mode corresponding to the output panel drive data.

Next, in S4704, it is determined whether or not the return drive flag is ON (S4704), if it is ON (YES in S4704), the process proceeds to S4710, and if it is not ON (NO in S4704), S4705 Proceed to processing. As described above, the return drive flag is that the frame movable decorative member 13 (effect movable body 13b, electric drive source) is driven according to the drive data for the return operation (drive data of the first drive mode) (the drive data of the first drive mode). It is a flag for making it possible to specify that the driving state of the frame movable decorative member 13 is a specific situation), that is, that the return operation is in progress. This return drive flag is turned on in S4709 described later and turned off in S4711 described later.

When it is determined in S4704 that the return drive flag is not ON (NO in S4704), the drive data (frame drive data) of the frame movable decorative member 13 that can be created at the time of setting the previous variation effect pattern (S4505) is the drive data. Determine if it is stored in the output buffer (S4705). The frame drive data includes drive data for effect operation (drive data of the second drive mode) for driving (operating) the frame movable decorative member 13 (effect movable body 13b) from the initial position toward the operation position, and operation position. There is drive data (drive data of the first drive mode) for the return operation to drive (operate) from the to the initial position. When the variable effect pattern set in the above-mentioned S4505 is a pattern including a frame movable effect in which the frame movable decorative member 13 is driven (operated) (frame movable development SP reach, winning pattern battle effect, etc.), the frame movable effect. Drive data (frame drive data) related to a series of operations from the start to the end of is created and stored in the drive data output buffer. In S4705, it is determined whether or not those frame drive data are stored.

When it is determined in S4705 that the frame drive data is not stored (NO in S4705), the process for driving (operating) the frame movable decorative member 13 (S4706, S4707) and the process related to the setting of the return drive flag. When this process is completed without performing (S4708, S4709) and it is determined that the data is stored (YES in S4705), it is determined whether or not it is the output time of the stored frame drive data (S4706). .. The output timing of the frame drive data is also determined based on the variation effect pattern that triggered the creation of the frame drive data, similarly to the output timing of the panel drive data. That is, it is determined according to the execution pattern of the frame movable effect included in the variable effect pattern set in S4505. In S4706, it is determined whether or not it is the output time based on the execution pattern (variable effect pattern) of the frame movable effect.

If it is determined by S4706 that it is time to output the frame drive data (YES in S4706), the target frame drive data is output (S4707), the process proceeds to S4708, and it is determined that it is not the time to output the frame drive data. If this is the case (YES in S4706), the frame movable decorative member 13 is scheduled to be driven, but it is not yet the driving time. Therefore, the processing related to the output of the frame driving data (S4707) and the setting of the return drive flag (S4708, S4709) is performed. This process is completed without any notice. By outputting the frame drive data by S4707, the frame movable decorative member 13 is driven (operated) in a drive mode corresponding to the output frame drive data.

Next, in S4708, it is determined whether or not the frame drive data output in the previous S4707 is the drive data for the return operation (drive data of the first drive mode) (S4708), and the drive data for the return operation is used. If there is (YES in S4708), turn on the return drive flag (S4709), finish this process, and if it is not drive data for return operation (NO in S4708), turn on the return drive flag (S4709). This process is completed without performing.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S4704 that the return drive flag is ON (YES in S4704), it is determined whether or not the return operation (return drive) of the frame movable decorative member 13 (effect movable body 13b) is completed. If the determination is made (S4710) and the return operation (return drive) is completed (YES in S4710), the return drive flag is turned off (S4711), this process is completed, and the return operation (return drive) is completed. If not (NO in S4710), this process ends without performing the process of turning off the return drive flag (S4711). The determination that the return operation (return drive) has been completed is, for example, that the output of the frame drive data for the return operation (frame drive data of the first drive mode) has been completed (driving by the drive amount to the initial position is completed). It is possible to do this based on the detection signal from the origin sensor that can detect that the effect movable body 13b is in the initial position.

The above is the main processing by the effect control microcomputer 91, but in addition to this, the control related to the following effect display is performed in cooperation with the image control microcomputer 101. That is, in this embodiment, when the variation mode (variation effect pattern) of the effect symbol 8 corresponds to the character effect or the SP reach effect, at a predetermined time during the variation display of the effect symbol 8 (during the variation display of the special symbol). The number of times the effect hold 9a (9b) to be displayed in the effect hold display area 9c (9d) of the lower image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the number of fluctuations to be displayed in the effect number display area 77 of the upper image display device 72 (display screen 72a) are displayed. The process of hiding (not displaying) the image 77a is performed.

Specifically, when the variable effect pattern corresponds to the SP reach effect, the effect is achieved at the timing of proceeding to the SP reach as shown in FIG. 52 (b) after the reach is established as shown in FIG. 52 (a). Hold 9a (9b) and the number of times image 77a are hidden (deleted from the display screen). This is to prevent the visual recognition of the effect display unfolded on the display screens 71a and 72b during the SP reach effect. For this reason, in the variable effect pattern including the SP reach, the timing for hiding the effect hold 9a (9b) and the number of times image 77a is defined. Therefore, when the variation effect start command set in the above-mentioned S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 is specified based on the received variation effect start command. When the variable effect pattern corresponds to the character effect or the SP reach effect, the non-display timing corresponding to the variable effect pattern is determined, and the effect hold 9a (9b) and the number of times image 77a are hidden. It should be noted that the hidden effect holding 9a (9b) and the number of times image 77a are each displayed (display is restored) at the timing when the variable effect is finished (the effect symbol is stopped and displayed). In this way, the display / non-display of the effect hold 9a (9b) displayed in the effect hold display area 9c (9d) can be switched, and the display / non-display of the number image 77a displayed in the variation number display area 77 can be switched. It can be said that the image control microcomputer 101 (image control unit) that performs such processing functions as a "display switching means".

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the display of the number image 77a (display of the variation display number) in the variation number display area 77 is displayed in a low base state (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy low base state). ), It is supposed to be done. The effect image (variable effect image) displayed on the display screen of the image display device when the variable effect (effect pattern game effect) is executed in this low base state is as follows. That is, as shown in FIG. 53, the variable effect image displayed on the lower image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the upper image display device 72 (display screen 72a) in the low base state has four layers (layer L1). It is a product (layer structure) obtained by superimposing (combining) ~ L4).

Specifically, as a layer L1 as a sub-symbol image constituting the variable display and the stop display of the small effect symbol 8a and the fourth symbol, and as a background image constituting the background (background of the variable effect) of the display screens 71a and 72a. Layer L2, layer L3 as the main symbol image constituting the variable display (up / down scroll display) and stop display of the effect symbol 8, and the effect hold (special symbol hold image) and the number of times image 77a (variation display number of times). The layer L4 and the layer L4 are superimposed (combined) and displayed on the display screen of the image display device. The process of synthesizing and displaying these layers L1 to L4 (image processing) is performed under the control of the image control board 100 (image control unit). Since the number image 77a is not displayed (display of the variation display number) in the high base state, the layer L4 shown in FIG. 53 is not used, and only the effect hold (special figure hold image) that does not include the number image 77a is used. Use a layer that becomes.

In this embodiment, of the four layer layers, the layer L1 is arranged at the lowest level, the layer L2 is arranged above the layer L1, the layer L3 is arranged above the layer L2, and the layer L4 is arranged above the layer L3. It has a layered structure. The arrangement order of each layer can be set in consideration of the possibility (frequency) of switching between display and non-display. That is, in this embodiment, the sub-symbol image is always displayed without being hidden when the variation effect is executed. In addition, the mode of the background image may change due to, for example, a background change effect, and although it is not hidden, there is a high possibility that the display mode will change as compared with the sub-designed image. Furthermore, the main symbol image may change in display size, display position, symbol design, etc. during the variable effect, and may be temporarily hidden, so it is compared to the sub symbol image and background image. There is a high possibility that the display mode will change. Further, since the display / non-display of the effect hold (special figure hold image) and the number image 77a (variation display number) may be switched depending on the variation effect pattern as described above, the sub-design image, the background image, and the main image are displayed. The frequency of switching between display and non-display is higher than that of the design image. In view of these facts, in this embodiment, the layer structure shown in FIG. 53 is adopted.

When the effect hold and the number of times image 77a are hidden during the execution of the variation effect (SP reach effect or character effect) for displaying the variation effect image composed of such four layers, the effect is displayed again after that. Performs the process of switching the display / non-display of the layer L4. Here, in this embodiment, since the effect hold (special figure hold image) and the number of times image 77a (variation display number of times) are on the same layer, different image display devices (lower image display device 71, upper image display device 72) are used. It is possible to hide or display the effect hold and the number of times image 77a displayed on the screen at the same timing (all at once).

Of the layers L1 to L4, any or all of the layers L1 to L3 are also referred to as a "first layer", and the layer L4 is also referred to as a "second layer".

Further, in this embodiment, as one of the advance notice effects related to the variation display of the identification information (special symbol or effect symbol) in the low base state, the variation display during execution (the variation display) is a big hit variation. It is possible to execute a "one-shot notification effect" (also referred to simply as a "notification effect") to notify before the end of the fluctuation display. This notification effect is executed based on the determination that the notification effect is executed in the above-mentioned advance notice effect setting process (S4506) and the execution pattern being set. As the execution pattern of the notification effect, there are various execution patterns such as emitting a predetermined notification sound and causing the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 to emit light in a predetermined color. As one of the execution patterns. In this embodiment, a pattern (also referred to as a “number display notification pattern”) for changing the display mode (display mode of the variation display number) of the number image 77a displayed in the variation number display area 77 is provided.

In the advance notice effect setting process (S4506), as described above, the random numbers related to the advance notice effect such as the random number for determining the advance notice effect acquired in S4501 and the advance notice effect pattern determination table stored in the ROM of the sub control board 90 are used. , The advance notice effect pattern is determined including whether or not the advance notice effect is executed. When the variation pattern of the special symbol that triggers the execution of this advance notice effect setting process is P1 or P2 (big hit variation with a variation time of 45,000 ms or more), that is, the variation effect pattern set in the above-mentioned S4505 is a reach effect or a character. In the case of a hit variation effect pattern including an effect, a lottery is performed in the advance notice effect setting process (S4506) for executing the notification effect (also referred to as “number display notification effect”) based on the number display notification pattern.

The number display notification effect of this embodiment is an effect of changing the display color of the number image 77a (variable display number) from a normal color (for example, silver) to a special color (for example, rainbow color), and the timing of the change. That is, there are a plurality of variations in the execution timing (execution timing) of the number display notification effect. Specifically, three execution timings are provided: (1) when the symbol change starts, (2) when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the symbol change, and (3) when the reach is established, and the number of times is displayed according to the execution timing. A notification pattern is provided. Here, in this embodiment, the number image 77a (variation display number of times) is hidden at the timing when the SP reach effect is developed in the variation effect, but the variation effect pattern to be executed of the number display notification effect is a hit variation effect. It is a pattern, and the possibility of executing SP reach production is high. In view of this, the above (1) to (3) are defined as the execution timing of the number display notification effect.

In the advance notice effect setting process (S4506), whether or not to execute the number display notification effect and the execution timing (any of the above (1) to (3)) are determined by random number lottery. As a result of the lottery, when the number display notification effect is executed, a variable effect start command including information indicating the execution pattern (execution timing) of the number display notification effect is set in the sub output buffer (S4507). The image control microcomputer 101 changes (changes) the display color of the number-of-times image 77a from the normal color to the special color according to the execution timing of the number-of-times display notification effect specified based on the variation effect start command. It can be said that the effect control microcomputer 91 and the image control microcomputer 101 that perform processing related to the execution of such a number-of-times display notification effect function as "notice effect means".

[Payout control main processing]
Next, the operation of the payout control microcomputer 116 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 67. The counters, flags, timers, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the payout control microcomputer 116 are provided in the RAM of the payout control board 110 (payout control microcomputer 116). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 116 provided on the payout control board 110 is used for the payout control main process shown in FIG. 57 from the ROM of the payout control board 110 (payout control microcomputer 116). Read and execute the program. As shown in the figure, in the payout control main process, the CPU initialization process is first performed (S5001). In the CPU initialization process (S5001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) and other settings, various flags, timers and counters are reset.

Next, the S5002 determines whether or not the power cutoff signal is ON and the content of the RAM of the payout control board 110 (payout control microcomputer 116) is normal (S5002). As a result, if the contents of the RAM are not normal (NO in S5002), the RAM is initialized (S5003), and loop processing that enables execution of the receive interrupt processing (S5004) and 1ms timer interrupt processing described later is performed. .. On the other hand, if the contents of the RAM are normal (YES in S5002), loop processing is performed without initializing the RAM. That is, if the power cutoff signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power cutoff signal is ON (NO in S5002), the RAM is initialized, but the power cutoff signal is turned on due to a power failure or the like. However, if the contents of the RAM are kept normal (YES in S5002), the RAM is not initialized. Initializing the RAM resets the values of various flags, timers and counters. The processes of S5001 to S5003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (at the time of turning on the power), and are not executed after that. Further, in the present embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 116 also performs the same processing as the power supply cutoff monitoring process (S210) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. 11, and the power supply cutoff signal is turned on due to a power failure or the like. Then, the data related to the payout control at that time is stored in the RAM of the payout control board 110 (payout control microcomputer 116). That is, the data related to the payout control in the event of a power failure such as a power failure is backed up. Therefore, unless the RAM of the payout control board 110 (payout control microcomputer 116) is initialized (S5003) when the power is turned on (when the power is turned off) after the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like. The state of payout control by the control microcomputer 116 returns to the state before the power failure occurred.

[Receive interrupt processing]
In the reception interrupt processing (S5004), as shown in FIG. 58, whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is an external INT input of the payout control microcomputer 116. It is determined whether or not the input has been made to the unit (S5101). Then, when it is determined in S5101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S5101), the process ends. On the other hand, when the S5101 determines that the strobe signal is ON (YES in the S5101), the command transmitted from the main control board 80 (hereinafter, also referred to as “reception command”) is used as the payout control board 110 (for payout control). It is stored in the RAM of the microcomputer 116) (S5102), and the processing is completed. This receive interrupt process (S5004) is a process that is executed in preference to other interrupt processes (S5005).

[1ms timer interrupt processing]
The 1 ms timer interrupt process (S5005) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a 1 ms cycle is input to the payout control board 110. As shown in FIG. 59, in the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S5005), first, a process of adding 1 to the first counter is performed (S5201). The first counter is for measuring the execution timing of the payout control process (S5204) described later, and in this embodiment, the value is set to 1 each with "0" as the initial value in the range of "0" to "3". It is to be added (updated) ("0 → 1 → 2 → 3"). In the subsequent S5202, a process of adding 1 to the second counter is performed (S5202). The second counter is for measuring the execution timing of the payout-related process (S5206) described later, and in this embodiment, the value is incremented by 1 with "0" as the initial value in the range of "0" to "2". It is supposed to be (updated) ("0 → 1 → 2"). The process of S5201 is also referred to as "first counter update process", and the process of S5202 is also referred to as "second counter update process".

Next, in S5203, it is determined whether or not the value of the first counter after 1 addition by S5201 is "3" (S5203), and if it is not "3" (NO in S5203), the processing of S5204 and S5205 is performed. If it is "3" (YES in S5203), the first counter is reset (initialized) (S5204), and the payout control process (S5205) described later is performed. Next, in S5206, it is determined whether or not the value of the second counter after 1 addition by S5202 is "2" (S5206), and if it is not "2" (NO in S5206), the processing of S5207 and S5208 is performed. If this process is "2" (YES in S5206), the second counter is reset (initialized) (S5207), and the payout-related process (S5208) described later is performed.

Here, since the above-mentioned processing of S5201 is executed based on the timer interrupt generated every 1 ms, the first counter is incremented (updated) by 1 every 1 ms. Therefore, when the value of the first counter becomes "3", it means that 3 ms has elapsed counting from the initial value "0". Therefore, the payout control process (S5205) described later is a process that is substantially executed every 3 ms. Further, since the above-mentioned processing of S5202 is executed based on the timer interrupt generated every 1 ms, the second counter is incremented (updated) by 1 every 1 ms like the above-mentioned first counter. Become. Therefore, when the value of the second counter becomes "2", it means that 2 ms has elapsed counting from the initial value "0". Therefore, the payout-related process (S5208) described later is a process that is substantially executed every 2 ms. Further, in this embodiment, the values of the first counter and the second counter are incremented (updated) by 1 by the processing of S5201 and S5202 for each execution of the 1ms timer interrupt processing (S5005) performed in the 1ms cycle. In the 1 ms timer interrupt processing on the 6th lap (n is a natural number of 1 or more), the value of the first counter becomes "3" and the value of the second counter becomes "2", so that the value of the first counter becomes "2". The timing when the value becomes "3" and the timing when the value of the second counter becomes "2" occur in the same timer interrupt processing. In this case, in this embodiment, since the determination process (S5203) of the first counter is performed before the determination process (S5206) of the second counter, the payout control process is prioritized over the payout-related process (S5208). (S5205) will be executed. This is because the payout control process (S5205) is a process mainly for driving control of the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 as described later, and is for improving the accuracy of the drive control of the payout motor 121.

In this embodiment, the first counter is incremented by 1 with "0" as the initial value in the range of "0" to "3", but the value is set to 1 with "3" as the initial value. It may be subtracted (updated) one by one. In this case, in the above-mentioned processing of S5203, it is determined whether or not the value of the first counter is "0", and each time the value becomes "0" (YES in S5203), the processing of S5205 is executed. Will be done. Similarly, in this embodiment, the second counter is incremented by 1 with "0" as the initial value in the range of "0" to "2", but the value is set with "2" as the initial value. It may be subtracted (updated) by one. In this case, in the above-mentioned processing of S5206, it is determined whether or not the value of the second counter is "0", and each time the value becomes "0" (YES in S5206), the processing of S5208 is executed. Will be done.

[Distributor control process]
Next, the payout device control process (S5205) executed by the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S5005) will be described. As described above, the payout device control process (S5205) is a process executed every time the value of the first counter becomes "3" (substantially every 3 ms), and refers to the payout device control process (S5205). Also referred to as "first control process". As shown in FIG. 60, in the payout device control process (S5205), first, it is determined whether or not the energization flag is OFF (S5301). The energization flag is a flag for making it possible to specify the current supply status to the payout motor 121 (stepping motor). It indicates that it is in an energized state (excited state). This energization flag is turned on in the payout motor energization start process (S5305) described later, and turns off in the payout motor energization stop process (S5310) described later.

When it is determined in S5301 that the energization flag is not OFF (NO in S5301), the process shifts to the processing of S5306 without performing the processing of S5302 to S5305, and it is determined that the energization flag is OFF. (NO in S5301), determine whether it is possible to start the payout operation (S5302). In this embodiment, when some abnormality occurs in the payout sensor 122 and the game ball (payout ball) cannot be detected normally (payout sensor error), the lower plate full sensor 62a detects the full state of the lower plate 62. If it is (lower plate full error) or if the ball-out state is detected by the ball-out sensor 152 (ball-out error), the payout operation cannot be started. Further, even when the payout sensor error, the lower plate full error, and the ball out error have not occurred, if the pause period timer set in the process of S5715 described later is not "0", the payout motor 121 The payout operation cannot be started because it is in a dormant period. On the other hand, if these errors have not occurred and the payout motor 121 is not in the pause period (the pause period timer is "0"), the payout operation can be started. Therefore, in S5302, if any of the payout sensor error, the lower plate full error, and the ball out error occurs, or if the pause period timer is not "0", the payout operation cannot be started. Judgment (NO in S5302), and this process is completed without performing the process after S5303. On the other hand, if this is not the case, it is determined that the payout operation can be started (YES in S5302), and the process proceeds to S5303. The judgment criteria (judgment condition, payout operation start condition) as to whether or not the payout operation can be started are not limited to those shown in this embodiment, and other judgment criteria can be set. Is.

In S5303, the payout number setting process (S5303) described later relating to the setting of the number of game balls to be paid out (payout number) is performed. Although the details will be described later, in the payout number setting process (S5303), when there is a request or instruction for paying out a game ball as a rental ball or a prize ball, the number of payouts related to the request or instruction is set in the payout schedule counter. .. Next, in S5304, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout schedule counter set in the payout number setting process (S5303) is "1" or more, and it is determined that the value is not "1" or more, that is, "0". If this is the case (NO in S5304), there is no game ball (prize ball or rental ball) to be paid out, so this process is completed without performing the process after S5305. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the payout counter is "1" or more (YES in S5304), there is a game ball (prize ball or rental ball) to be paid out. In this case, the payout device In order to start the payout operation of the game ball by the payout motor 121, the process proceeds to S5305.

In S5305, the payout motor energization start process (S5305) described later is performed, and then the pre-rotation flag set to ON in the payout motor energization start process (S5305) and the payout motor energization start process (S5305) set the predetermined time. Judgment (S5306, S5307) related to the pre-rotation timer that is set and starts operation (timekeeping) is performed. Although the details will be described later, in the drive control of the payout motor 121 according to the present embodiment, when the payout operation by the payout device 120 is started, first, the rotary shaft (drive shaft) is set to the energized state (excitation state) of the payout motor 121. Is controlled to a "non-rotating energized state" in which the motor is not rotated, and the non-rotating energized state is maintained for a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) (see "non-rotating energized period" in FIG. 68). Then, the rotation (drive) of the payout motor 121 (rotating shaft) is started based on the elapse of the period of the non-rotating energization state (hereinafter, also referred to as "non-rotating energization period"). Corresponding to this, when the pre-rotation flag is ON and the pre-rotation timer is not "0" (YES in S5306, NO in S5307), during the non-rotation energization period that controls the payout motor 121 to the non-rotation energization state. Therefore, in this case, this process is completed without performing the process after S5308. On the other hand, when the pre-rotation flag is ON and the pre-rotation timer is "0" (YES in S5306, NO in S5307), the non-rotation energization period (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed. In this case, the payout motor rotation start process (S5308), the payout motor rotation process (S5309), and the payout motor energization stop process (S5310), which will be described later, are performed to complete this process. Further, when it is determined in S5306 that the pre-rotation flag is not ON (OFF) (NO in S5306), it is set to ON when the rotation of the payout motor 121 is stopped in the process during rotation of the payout motor (S5309) described later. When it is determined whether or not the flag is ON (S5311) and not ON (OFF) (NO in S5311), the payout motor 121 is rotating (driving). In this case, without performing the payout motor rotation start process (S5308), the payout motor rotation process (S5309) and the payout motor energization stop process (S5310) are performed to complete this process. On the other hand, when it is determined in S5311 that the flag is ON after stopping (YES in S5311), the payout motor 121 has finished rotating and is in the stopped state. In this case, the payout motor rotation start process (S5308) and This process is completed by performing the payout motor energization stop process (S5310) without performing the payout motor rotating process (S5309).

[Payout number setting process]
Next, the payout number setting process (S5303) executed in the above-mentioned payout device control process (S5205) will be described. As shown in FIG. 61, in the payout number setting process (S5303), first, it is determined whether or not there is a ball lending payout request (S5401). Here, the ball lending request is that when the ball lending button (not shown) provided in the CR operation unit is operated by the player, the operation signal is input to the card unit 135 and received. A ball lending request signal is output from the card unit 135, and the ball lending request signal is input to the payout control board 110. In this embodiment, the ball lending request signal is output 5 times from the card unit 135 for each operation of the ball lending button, and 25 pieces are output for each output of the ball lending request signal. The rental ball is paid out (rented out). That is, in this embodiment, 125 balls are paid out for each operation of the ball lending button. The number of times the ball rental request signal output from the card unit 135 is output per operation of the ball rental button can be arbitrarily set on the card unit 135 side, and is usually performed in the game hall. It is set according to the fixed ball rental unit price.

When it is determined by S5401 that there is a ball lending withdrawal request (YES in S5401), that is, when it is determined that there is an input of a ball lending withdrawal request signal from the card unit 135, the payout control microcomputer 116 is a payout schedule counter. Set "25" to (S5402) to finish this process. The payout schedule counter indicates the presence or absence of game balls to be paid out and the number of payouts (planned payout number) when there are game balls to be paid out, and is a subtraction formula in which 1 is subtracted for each game ball to be paid out. It is a counter of. On the other hand, when it is determined in S5401 that there is no ball lending request (NO in S5401), it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball counter is "1" or more (S5403). The prize ball counter is a counter that can be set by the command analysis process (S6005) of the payout-related control process (S5208) described later, and when the prize ball payout command is received from the main control board 80, the received prize ball. The number of prize balls specified based on the payout command is set. That is, the prize ball counter indicates the number of game balls (number of prize balls) to be paid out as prize balls, and when the value of the prize ball counter is "1" or more, there is a request to pay out the prize balls. Become.

If it is determined in S5403 that the value of the prize ball counter is not "1" or more, that is, "0" (NO in S5403), there is no prize ball to be paid out, so processing after S5404 is performed. This process is completed without doing it. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter is "1" or more (YES in S5403), it is determined whether or not the value is "25" or more (S5404), and it is "25" or more. (YES in S5404), set "25" to the payout schedule counter (S5405), subtract "25" from the prize ball counter (S5406), and finish this process. On the other hand, when the value of the prize ball counter is "1" or more and less than "25" (NO in S5404), the value of the current prize ball counter is set in the payout scheduled counter (S5407), and the prize ball counter is set. Clear to zero (S5408) and finish this process. If the value of the prize ball counter after subtracting "25" in S5406 is "1" or more, the processing after S5404 is performed in the next payout number setting process (S5303), and the prize ball counter at that time is performed. If the value is "25" or more (YES in S5404), the processing of S5405 and S5406 is performed, and if the value is less than "25" (NO in S5404), the processing of S5407 and S5408 is performed. In this way, the processing after S5404 is performed until the value of the prize ball counter becomes "0" (until it is determined as NO by S5403).

Here, in the payout number setting process (S5303) of this embodiment, it is once determined by the payout device 120 (payout motor 121) whether or not the value of the prize ball counter is “25” or more in S5404. This is because the maximum number of game balls that can be paid out for each payout operation is 25. This takes into consideration the load applied to the payout motor 121, the temperature rise (heat generation) of the payout motor 121, and the like. In addition, the value of the prize ball counter becomes "25" or more, for example, during a big hit game (during a round game), a large number of games in the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 or second big winning opening 35). When a prize ball payout command for specifying the number of prize balls corresponding to the balls enters in quick succession is transmitted from the main control board 80 to the payout control board 110, and the prize ball counter is set based on this. Is. Further, in the payout number setting process (S5303) of this embodiment, the judgment (S5401) relating to the presence / absence of the ball lending payout request is prioritized over the judgment (S5403) regarding the presence / absence of the prize ball payout request (value of the prize ball counter). If both the ball lending request and the prize ball payout request occur at the same time, the lending ball payout will be given priority. This is because the payout of the ball lending (request for paying out the ball lending) is a direct instruction based on the operation of the ball lending button by the player.

[Discharging motor energization start processing]
Next, the payout motor energization start process (S5305) executed in the above-mentioned payout device control process (S5205) will be described. A series of drive controls (S5305, S5308 to S5310) from the start of rotation (start of drive) to the stop of rotation (stop of drive) of the payout motor 121 according to this embodiment are performed according to the flow of the timing chart shown in FIG. 68. .. As shown in FIG. 62 (a), in the payout motor energization start process (S5305), first, the payout motor 121 is started to be energized (S5501). At this time, the payout control microcomputer 116 starts outputting a signal (current control signal) for supplying the rated current to the payout motor 121 via a drive circuit (not shown), and energizes the payout motor 121 to drive the current 100. However, the output of the signal (pulse signal) for switching the excitation phase of the payout motor 121 is not started, and the payout motor 121 is set to the non-rotating energized state (non-rotating exciting state) (S5501). Next, the energization flag indicating that the payout motor 121 is energized (energized state) is turned ON (S5502), the pre-rotation flag is turned ON (S5503), and a predetermined time is set in the pre-rotation timer (S5502). S5504), this process is completed. Here, the pre-rotation flag and the pre-rotation timer are for measuring the rotation start timing of the payout motor 121 in the non-rotation energized state, and are referred to in the above-mentioned determination process of S5306 and S5307. Further, the pre-rotation timer is a subtraction type timer that defines the time (non-rotational energization period) for keeping the payout motor 121 in the non-rotational energization state before the start of rotation of the payout motor 121. The operation (timekeeping) is started. In this embodiment, the predetermined time set in the pre-rotation timer is set to 4 ms (see FIG. 68). By the above-mentioned payout motor energization start process (S5305), the payout motor 121 is put into a non-rotational energization state (non-rotational excitation state) before the start of rotation (before the start of the payout operation) at the start of the payout operation. By setting the non-rotational energization state (non-rotational excitation state) before the start of rotation of the payout motor 121 (before the start of the payout operation) in this way, it becomes possible to stabilize the rotation shaft of the payout motor 121, and as a result. When the rotation of the payout motor 121 starts, the game ball located in the vicinity of the screw 123 (upstream side) in the ball passage 126 becomes stable (see FIGS. 55 and 56), and the payout of the game ball can be started smoothly. Will be.

[Dispensing motor rotation start processing]
Next, the payout motor rotation start process (S5308) executed in the above-mentioned payout device control process (S5205) will be described. This process (S5308) is a process executed when the above-mentioned pre-rotation flag is ON (YES in S5306) and the pre-rotation timer becomes “0” (YES in S5307). That is, it is a process executed based on the elapse of the non-rotational energization period. As shown in FIG. 62B, in the payout motor rotation start processing (S5308), first, the output of the pulse signal (drive pulse) for switching the excitation phase of the payout motor 121 is started, and the payout motor 121 is rotated (driven). ) Is started (S5601). As a result, the payout motor 121 starts rotating (driving) with the lapse of the non-rotating energization period, and the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 120 is started (see FIG. 68). Next, the pre-rotation flag turned ON in the above-mentioned S5503 is turned OFF (S5602), the rotation start flag is turned ON (S5603), and the present process is completed. The rotation start flag is a flag indicating that the non-rotational energization state has ended (the non-rotational energization period has elapsed) and the rotation (drive) of the payout motor 121 has started. See at.

[Processing while the payout motor is rotating]
Next, the payout motor rotating process (S5309) executed in the above-mentioned payout device control process (S5205) will be described. This process (S5309) is a process related to drive control during motor rotation from the start of rotation (start of drive) to the stop of rotation (stop of drive) of the payout motor 121. As shown in FIG. 63, in the payout motor rotating process (S5309), first, it is determined whether or not a payout sensor error has occurred (S5701). This is for determining whether or not some abnormality such as a detection failure has occurred in the payout sensor 122. For example, the signal of the payout sensor 122 is continuously turned on for a predetermined time or longer (for example, 1000 ms or longer). In some cases, or when the payout sensor 122 does not detect the game ball (payout ball) even after a predetermined time (for example, 150 ms) has elapsed from the start of rotation of the payout motor 121 (payout operation start), a payout sensor error (payout sensor error) occurs. ) Is generated. Then, when it is determined that a payout sensor error has occurred (YES in S5701), the process proceeds to the process of S5711 described later (FIG. 64), and when it is determined that no payout sensor error has occurred (NO in S5701). , Determine whether a lower plate full error or a ball out error has occurred (S5702). This is to determine whether or not the lower plate 62 is full or the payout device 120 is out of balls, and it is determined that a lower plate full error has occurred when the detection signal of the lower plate full sensor 62a is ON. Then, when the detection signal of the ball-out sensor 152 is ON, it is determined that the ball-out error has occurred. Then, when it is determined that a lower plate full error or a ball out error has occurred (YES in S5702), the process proceeds to the process of S5709 (FIG. 64) described later, and both the lower plate full error and the ball out error occur. If it is determined that it has not been done (NO in S5702), the process proceeds to S5703. That is, when none of the payout sensor error, the lower plate full error, and the ball out error has occurred, that is, when the payout operation can be performed normally, the process proceeds to S5703.

In S5703, it is determined whether or not the detection signal of the payout sensor 122 is turned ON (S5703), and if it is not turned ON (NO in S5703), this process is completed without performing the process after S5704 and turned ON. If it becomes (YES in S5703), the payout schedule counter is subtracted by "1" (S5704). As described above, the payout schedule counter indicates the number of game balls to be paid out (the remaining number of game balls to be paid out). Next, when it is determined whether or not the rotation start flag is ON (S5705) and it is determined that it is not ON (NO in S5705), the processing of S5708 is performed without processing S5706 and S5707 (Fig.). 64), when it is determined to be ON (YES in S5705), a signal (current control signal) that lowers the current value of the drive current supplied to the payout motor 121 is output (S5706), and the rotation start flag is output. Is turned off (S5705). As a result, after the rotation of the payout motor 121 starts (after the payout operation starts), the drive current supplied to the payout motor 121 is calculated based on the detection of the first (first) game ball (payout ball) by the payout sensor 122. The current value will decrease (see FIG. 68). After that, the payout motor 121 continues to rotate with the drive current suppressed until the end condition of the payout operation is satisfied (for example, until the value of the payout schedule counter becomes "0"). By reducing the current value of the drive current of the payout motor 121 in this way, it is possible to reduce the load applied to the payout motor 121 and suppress the temperature rise. Further, after the rotation of the payout motor 121 is started, the current value is lowered based on the detection of the first (first) game ball (payout ball) by the payout sensor 122, so that the current value is lowered at a fixed timing in the initial stage of the payout operation. Since the current value can be reduced, the certainty of control related to the current value reduction can be enhanced, and the load of the payout motor 121 can be reduced and the temperature rise of the payout motor 121 can be effectively suppressed. In this embodiment, the drive current (current value) of the payout motor 121 is suppressed to 75% (that is, reduced by 25%) compared to the start of rotation (100%) (see FIG. 68). .. Further, the rate of reducing the drive current (current value) (current value after the decrease) is not limited to this embodiment, and can be arbitrarily set in consideration of the specifications of the payout motor and the like.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64, in S5708, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout schedule counter after subtracting "1" in the previous S5704 is "0" (S5708), and it is not "0" (S5708). If it is "1" or more) (S5708), this process is completed without performing the process after S5711. In this case, the payout motor 121 will continue to rotate. On the other hand, when the value of the scheduled payout counter is "0" (YES in S5708), that is, when the payout of the number of game balls to be paid out is completed in this payout operation, the drive current supplied to the payout motor 121 is completed. A signal (current control signal) that raises the current value to 100% is output (S5711), and the output of the pulse signal that switches the excitation phase of the payout motor 121 is stopped to stop the rotation of the payout motor 121 (S5712). ). As a result, the payout motor 121 is in a non-rotational energization state (non-rotational excitation state) as before the start of rotation (before the start of the payout operation). Then, following the process of S5712, the flag after stop is turned ON (S5713), the predetermined time is set in the timer after stop and the pause period timer (S5714, S5715), and this process is completed.

Here, the flag after stop and the timer after stop are for measuring the energization stop (end) timing of the payout motor 121 in the non-rotating energized state, and are referred to in the motor energization stop process (S5310) described later. It is a thing. Further, the post-stop timer is a subtraction type timer that defines the time (non-rotational energization period) for keeping the payout motor 121 in the non-rotational energization state after the rotation of the payout motor 121 is stopped. The operation (timekeeping) is started. In this embodiment, the predetermined time set in the timer after stopping is set to 16 ms (see FIG. 68). In this way, by setting the payout motor 121 to a non-rotating energized state when the rotation is stopped, it is possible to generate the maximum static torque of the payout motor 121 at the end of the payout operation and eliminate the problem that the game ball is paid out excessively. Will be. The time set in the timer after stopping is not limited to this embodiment, and can be arbitrarily set in consideration of the specifications and performance of the payout motor, the payout speed, and the like.

Further, the pause period timer is a subtraction type timer that defines a period (pause period) in which the payout operation is paused in order to prevent the payout operation by the payout device 120 (payout motor 121) from being continuously performed for a long time. The operation (timekeeping) is started with the processing of S5715 as an opportunity. In this embodiment, the predetermined time set in the pause period timer is 248 ms (see FIG. 69). In this way, by setting the pause period when the rotation of the payout motor 121 is stopped, it is possible to prevent the payout operation from being continuously performed for a long time, and a plurality of payout opportunities are established in quick succession. Even if this is the case (for example, when multiple game balls enter one or more entrances in quick succession), it is possible to prevent multiple payout operations corresponding to this from being continuously performed. Become. Specifically, in this embodiment, for example, when paying out more than 25 game balls, a pause period (pause period timer) is set when the payout of 25 game balls is completed. After the pause period elapses, the payout operation is restarted to pay out the remaining game balls (see FIG. 69 (a)). In addition, if the next payout trigger is established during the execution of the payout operation (during the payout operation period), the next payout trigger will be reached after a pause period after the execution of the payout operation (previous payout operation) is completed. The corresponding payout operation (later payout operation) is to be started (see FIG. 69 (a)). In this way, it is possible to reduce the load on the payout motor 121 by interposing a pause period in a situation where the payout operation is continuously performed, and it is possible to suppress the temperature rise of the payout motor 121. It is possible to plan. The time set in the pause period timer is not limited to this embodiment, and can be arbitrarily set in consideration of the specifications and performance of the payout motor, the payout speed, and the like.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the payout sensor error has occurred in the above-mentioned S5701 (YES in S5701), the processing after S5711 is subsequently performed, and the rotation (payout operation) of the payout motor 121 is immediately stopped. Therefore, if a payout sensor error occurs during the rotation of the payout motor 121 (during the payout operation), the rotation of the payout motor 121 (payout operation) is immediately stopped. This is because it is not possible to pay out the game ball accurately. Further, when it is determined that the lower plate full error or the ball out error has occurred in the above-mentioned S5702 (YES in the S5702), it is subsequently determined whether or not the detection signal of the payout sensor 122 is turned ON (S5709). ), If it is not ON (NO in S5709), this processing is completed without performing the processing after S5710, and if it is ON (YES in S5709), the payout schedule counter is subtracted by "1" (S5710), S5711 or later. Is performed to stop the rotation (payout operation) of the payout motor 121. Therefore, if the lower plate 62 is full or the payout device 120 is out of balls while the payout motor 121 is rotating (during the payout operation), the next game ball payout (payout ball) is detected thereafter. Based on this, the rotation of the payout motor 121 (payout operation) is stopped (see FIG. 69 (b)). This is because the lower plate full error and the ball out error are minor errors as compared with the payout sensor error, and it is less necessary to stop the payout motor 121 immediately.

[Discharging motor energization stop processing]
Next, the payout motor energization stop process (S5310) executed in the above-mentioned payout device control process (S5205) will be described. As shown in FIG. 65, in the payout motor energization stop processing (S5310), first, it is determined whether or not the flag is ON after the stop (S5801), and when it is determined that the flag is not ON (OFF) (in S5801). NO), this process is completed without performing the process after S5802. On the other hand, when it is determined that the post-stop flag is ON (YES in S5801), it is determined whether or not the post-stop timer is "0" (S5802), and it is determined that the post-stop timer is not "0". (NO in S5802), this process is completed without performing the process after S5803. Here, the flag after stop and the timer after stop are set when the rotation of the payout motor 121 is stopped in S5713 and S5714 of the above-mentioned processing during rotation of the payout motor (S5309), and after the rotation of the payout motor 121 is stopped. , 16 ms non-rotational energization period (non-rotational energization state) is set. Corresponding to this, when the flag after stop is ON and the timer after stop is not "0" (YES in S5801 and NO in S5802), during the non-rotational energization period in which the payout motor 121 is controlled to the non-rotational energization state. Therefore, in this case, this process is completed without performing the process after S5803.

On the other hand, when the timer is determined to be "0" after the stop in S5802 (YES in S5802), the energization to the payout motor 121 is stopped (S5803), the flag is turned off after the stop, and the flag is turned off (S5803). , Turn off the energization flag (S5805), and finish this process. In this way, the energization of the payout motor 121 is stopped based on the elapse of the non-rotational energization period after the rotation of the payout motor 121 is stopped (see FIG. 68).

Here, among the series of drive controls from the start of rotation (start of drive) to the stop of rotation (stop of drive) of the payout motor 121 described above, the control based on the processing of S5305 and S5308 is also referred to as "first drive control". The control based on the processing of S5706 is also referred to as "second drive control", and the control based on the processing of S5711 and S5712 is also referred to as "third drive control".

[Payout-related control processing]
Next, the payout-related control process (S5208) executed by the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S5005) will be described. As described above, the payout-related control process (S5208) is a process executed every time the value of the second counter becomes "2" (substantially every 2 ms), and is a payout-related control process (S5208). Also referred to as "second control processing". In the payout-related control process (S5208), the control process carried out by the payout control board 110 (payout control microcomputer 116) other than the payout device control process (S5205) described above, specifically, the input process as shown in FIG. (S6001), output processing (S6002), status monitoring processing (S6003), timer update processing (S6004), command analysis processing (S6005) and other processing (S6006) are performed.

In the input process (S6001), detection signals from various sensors such as the lower plate full sensor 62a, the ball out sensor 152, and the payout sensor 122, and an error release switch for canceling the error state related to the payout device 120 (not shown). Detect data (edge data and level data) corresponding to various input signals such as the detection signal from. In the output process (S6002), lighting data for lighting various notification LEDs and 7 segments (not shown) connected to the payout control board 110, various commands for the main control board 80, and a payout device 120 (payout motor 121). ), Various data and signals such as drive signals (drive data) are output. The commands to be output (transmitted) to the main control board 80 include, for example, a full state of the lower plate 62, a ball out state of the payout device 120, and a payout abnormality (abnormality of the payout motor 121 and the payout sensor 122). A command indicating that an error has occurred (error occurrence command), a command indicating that those errors have been cleared (error cancellation command), and a command indicating that the payout operation by the payout device 120 (payout motor 121) has started (payout). There is a command that indicates the status of the payout control side, such as the start command). When the main control board 80 receives such a command from the payout control board 110, the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) issues a payout-related notification effect to the sub control board 90 after necessary. An effect command for execution is transmitted, and in response to this, the sub-control board 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) causes the frame lamp 66 to emit light in a predetermined notification effect pattern, or outputs a predetermined notification sound from the speaker 67. Or display a predetermined notification effect image on the image display device.

Next, in the state monitoring process (S6003), a state related to the occurrence / cancellation of a payout-related error such as a full state of the lower plate 62, a ball out state of the payout device 120, and a payout abnormality (abnormality of the payout motor 121 and the payout sensor 122). Monitor. In the timer update process (S6004), various timers such as the above-mentioned pre-rotation timer, post-stop timer, and pause period timer are updated. In the command analysis process (S6005), the process described later is performed, and in the other processes (S6006), the card unit 135 such as the input of the ball lending withdrawal request signal from the card unit 135 and the output of the ball lending withdrawal completion signal to the card unit 135. Communicate with.

[Command analysis processing]
Next, the command analysis process (S6005) executed in the payout-related control process (S5208) will be described. As shown in FIG. 67, in the command analysis process (S6005), first, it is determined whether or not the received command from the main control board 80 is stored in the RAM (S6101). The reception command from the main control board 80 is the RAM of the payout control board 110 (payout control microcomputer 116) triggered by the input of the strobe signal (STB signal) from the main control board 80 by the above-mentioned reception interrupt processing (S5004). Stored by. If it is determined that the received command is not stored in S6101 (NO in S6101), this processing is completed without performing the processing after S6102, and if it is determined that it is stored (YES in S6101), it is stored. It is determined whether or not the received command (received command) is a prize ball payout command (S6102).

If the S6102 determines that the receiving command is a prize ball payout command (YES in S6102), the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball payout command is set in the prize ball counter (S6103), and this process ends. .. If there are multiple received prize ball payout commands, the number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) specified by each prize ball payout command is set in the prize ball counter. The set prize ball counter is referred to in the above-mentioned payout number setting process (S5303), and the value of the prize ball counter is set in the payout schedule counter (S5405, S5407). On the other hand, when the S6102 determines that the received command is not the prize ball payout command (NO in S6102), the process according to the received command other than the prize ball payout command is performed (S6104), and this process ends. In S6104, for example, data for lighting various notification LEDs connected to the payout control board 110 and lighting 7 segments and the like is created, and an effect command to be transmitted to the sub control board 90 is set in the output buffer. As a receiving command other than the prize ball payout command, for example, there is a connection confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 80 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. In addition, an invalid command that is not originally transmitted (not received) from the main control board 80 may be received (reception command abnormality).

[Action and effect of the example]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first counter update process (S5201) and the second counter update process (S5202) are performed in the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S5005) by the payout control microcomputer 116. Every time the value of the first counter becomes "3", the payout device control process (S5205) related to the drive control of the payout device 120 (payout motor 121) is performed, and every time the value of the second counter becomes "2". It is supposed to perform payout-related control processing (S5208). Therefore, a plurality of processes having substantially different control cycles, specifically, a control process (S5208) related to the payout device 120 (payout motor 121) and a control process (S6001 to S6006) of other payout-related parts. Can be performed with one timer interrupt (1 ms timer interrupt in this embodiment) as an opportunity. By doing so, for example, due to a model change of a game machine, among various electric parts that have been used before, a specific electric part (for example, a payout motor) is changed to a new part different from the previous one, and a new frame is used. When designing, it is possible to design the control suitable for the new component separately from the control related to the conventional electric component (for example, the control related to the electric component other than the payout motor), and the control related to the new electric component. It is possible to obtain a control program that does not cause any trouble even if the conventional control and the conventional control are mixed. This makes it possible to stabilize the operation of the gaming machine while ensuring the degree of freedom in design including the selection of electrical parts used for the gaming machine. Further, when a plurality of processes having different control cycles are executed with one timer interrupt as a trigger, it is not necessary to consider the protection of the multiple interrupt register and the memory, which facilitates the program design.

Further, in the present embodiment, among the parts (frame parts) provided on the game machine frame side (front frame, main body frame), the frame parts (payout device 120) that function under the control of the payout control board 110 (payout control unit). Dispensing device control processing (dispensing device control processing) based on 1ms timer interrupt processing (S5005) for (dispensing motor 121, payout sensor 121), payout motor drive circuit, lower plate full sensor 62a, ball out sensor 152, notification LED, etc. S5205) and payout-related control processing (S5208) shall be performed. This makes it possible to realize control (frame control) related to frame parts suitable for structural change (model change) of the frame body. In addition, by increasing or decreasing the counter update process in one timer interrupt, it is possible to add or delete processes with different control cycles, so parts changes, design changes, specification changes, etc. due to model changes, etc. Can be easily dealt with.

Further, according to the drive control of the payout motor according to the present embodiment, after the rotation (drive) of the payout motor 121 is started, the current value of the drive current is lowered without stopping the rotation (drive) of the payout motor 121. Since the rotation is continued, it is possible to reduce the load on the payout motor and suppress the temperature rise without frequently stopping the rotation (drive) of the payout motor 121 in the payout operation based on one payout trigger. Further, the drive control of the payout motor is not complicated, and the smooth payout operation is not hindered.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for a plurality of effects such as image display devices 71 and 72, movable decorative members 13, 14, board surface lamp 5 (board LED), frame lamp 66 (frame LED), speaker 67, and the like. Among the electrical components of the above, it is possible to set a restricted state in which the drive of the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) is restricted. Then, when the frame movable decorative member 13 (effect movable body 13b) is in the return operation when the variable display of the identification information (special symbol, effect symbol) is started, the restricted state is set and the frame lamp 66 is set. It is possible to limit the drive of. Here, the fluctuation start time of the identification information (special symbol, effect symbol) is set by various electric parts included in the gaming machine, such as the special symbol display 41, the board lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, the image display devices 71, 72, and the speaker 67. Is the timing to start the operation all at once, and it is also the timing to increase the power consumption (driving power) by that amount. At such a fluctuation start time, if the return operation (driving by the first drive mode) of the frame movable decorative member 13 accompanying the end of the frame movable effect related to the previous variation display (variation effect) is performed, the variation starts. The amount of power consumption (driving power amount) at the time will increase more than usual, and if the electric parts such as the movable panel decorative member 14 are further operated under such a situation, the amount of power consumption will be excessive. In this respect, in this embodiment, under the condition that the return operation of the frame movable decorative member 13 (effect movable body 13b) is performed at the fluctuation start time, the drive of the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) is restricted, and the frame. All or part of the lamp 66 (frame LED) is stopped from emitting light (driving). This makes it possible to prevent the power consumption (driving power) from becoming excessive and reduce the risk of damage or failure of various electric parts and power supply boards constituting the game machine. As a result, it is possible to avoid hindering the progress of various game effects and other games, and it is possible to ensure stable operation of the game machine.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the frame movable decorative member 13 is performing a return operation at the time when the identification information (special symbol, effect symbol) changes, and the gaming state at that time is In cases other than the high accuracy and high base state, all light emission (driving) of the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) is stopped, and in the case of the high accuracy and high base state, a part of the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) is stopped. It is supposed to stop the light emission (drive). In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment in the high accuracy and high base state is the V-passing scheduled big hit (15R 1st big hit, 15R 5th big hit) and the 15R big hit game is performed, before the big hit game starts. The frame movable decorative member 13 that has been in an operating state (a state in which the effect movable body 13b has appeared) due to the frame movable effect is maintained in the operating state even during the big hit play. With the start of the ending period (4 seconds) at the end of the big hit game, the return operation (5.5 seconds) is performed.

Therefore, when the gaming state when the frame movable decorative member 13 is performing the return operation at the fluctuation start time is the high accuracy high base state, this is related to the V passing planned jackpot generated in the high accuracy high base state. This is when the first variable display after the jackpot game ends is started. It is advantageous for the player to stop (limit) all the light emission (drive) of the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) at the time of the first fluctuation display after the big hit game in the continuous villa where the probability change continues. Even though it is in a gaming state, the effect of the illumination of the front frame 51 (frame light emitting effect) is reduced at once, which may give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, when the gaming state when the frame movable decorative member 13 is performing the return operation at the fluctuation start time is the high accuracy and high base state, all the light emission (driving) of the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) is stopped. Instead, some light emission (driving) is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect and make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, if the gaming state when the frame movable decorative member 13 is performing the return operation at the start time of the fluctuation is other than the high accuracy and high base state, this is the next after the end of the fluctuation effect with the frame movable and the development SP reach. When the fluctuation display of is started, that is, when the next fluctuation display following the end of the previous deviation fluctuation is started. In this case, even though the SP reach production with high jackpot reliability (with movable frame) was performed, it was after the disengagement was confirmed, so it was very disappointing for the player, and the ramp 66 (under such a situation) Even if all the light emission (driving) of the frame LED) is stopped (restricted), it is considered that there is almost no hindrance in the production. Therefore, if the gaming state when the frame movable decorative member 13 is performing the return operation at the fluctuation start time is other than the high accuracy and high base state, all the light emission (driving) of the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) is stopped. Instead of doing so, some light emission (driving) is stopped.

As described above, the limiting mode (driving mode) of the lamp 66 (frame LED) is determined according to the gaming state when the frame movable decorative member 13 is performing the return operation at the start time of the change of the identification information (special symbol, effect symbol). ) Is different, it is possible to limit the drive of electrical parts suitable for the situation, and as a result, while preventing the power consumption (drive power) from becoming excessive, the effect of the drive limit is achieved. It is possible to suppress the decline and the decline in the entertainment interest.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, under the control of the effect control microcomputer 91 and the image control microcomputer 101 (that is, under the effect control), until a big hit (first hit) occurs in a low base state. The number of variations of the special symbol (first special symbol) is counted, and the number image 77a (number of variations) based on the counted value is displayed in the variation number display area 77 of the upper image display device 72 (display screen 72a). It has become a thing. The low base state is a gaming state in which the staying period is longer than that of a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot gaming state, a probability change state, and a time saving state, while the gaming machine is in operation (during the business hours of the gaming hall). This is the game state that is the basis for the player to advance the game. The number of fluctuations of the special symbol (first special symbol) in the game state, which is the basis of the game progress, is an index (barometer) for judging the game status (borderline, continuation / end of the game, etc.) until the big hit occurs. ), Which is of great concern to the player. By displaying the variable display number of times that attracts the player's attention on the image display device (upper image display device 72 in this example), the player can see the displayed content and see the game hall (island equipment). It is possible to grasp the number of fluctuations displayed with a small amount of line-of-sight movement without relying on the data display or the like provided in the system.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a frame movable decorative member 13 above the front frame 51, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the gaming hall. In this state, the data display and the like provided in the island equipment may be obstructed by the frame movable decorative member 13, and may be difficult to see from the player (player during the game) seated in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. be. In this regard, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the number of times image 77a (variation display number of times) is displayed in the variation number display area 77 of the upper image display device 72 (display screen 72a), so that the gaming machine frame. It is useful in that it becomes possible to grasp the number of variable display times without being influenced by the configuration of the data display, the specifications of the data display, the installation mode, and the like.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of times image 77a (variation display number of times) is not displayed in the high base state. In the high base state, the opening extension function of the second starting port 21 (ordinary electric accessory) and the function of shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol work, and the game ball enters the second starting port 21. The variation display of the second special symbol based on the above is frequently performed, but when the number image 77a (variation display number) is displayed under such a situation, the variation display number indicated by the number image 77a increases at high speed. , The displayed contents will change rapidly. The display of the number of times image 77a (display of the number of variable display times) in such a high base state is less useful for the player than the case of displaying in the low base state, and rather concentrates on the player's game. There is a risk of harming power. In this regard, by displaying the number of times image 77a (variable display number of times) only in the low base state as in the present embodiment, such a concern can be eliminated. In the high base state, instead of the addition display of the fluctuation display number in the low base state, the "subtraction display of the remaining fluctuation display number" for notifying the player of the fluctuation display number that can be executed until the end of the high base state. May be done. In this way, it is possible to show the player the end of the high base state in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the situation of the variable effect being executed, specifically, when the SP reach effect is developed, the effect hold 9a (9b) and the number of times images displayed up to that point are displayed. 77a is hidden, and when the variation effect ends, the original display state is restored (see FIG. 52). As a result, the display of the effect hold and the number of times image (variable display number of times) that may hinder the visual recognition of the effect display unfolded on the display screen of the image display device during the SP reach effect is temporarily eliminated, and the appearance of the effect display is improved. Can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, by changing the display mode (display color in this example) of the number of times image 77a (variation display number of times), the fluctuation effect during execution (variation display of the special symbol) is a big hit. A one-shot notification effect (number display notification effect) for notifying that the fluctuation is possible can be executed. Therefore, the display of the number of times image 77a (display of the number of times of variation display) in the variation number display area 77 is not limited to the mere display of information related to the progress of the game, but also has the interest of the advance notice effect. As a result, it is possible to achieve an unprecedented effect such as attracting the player's interest to the number-of-times image 77a during the variable effect and improving the game entertainment.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is counted during the initial predetermined period (specific period) after the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state (normal state). It is assumed that the number image 77a (variable display number) is not displayed at the same time. This is because immediately after the gaming state becomes the low base state, the second special symbol hold that occurred in the high base state immediately before that remains undigested, which is advantageous compared to the first special symbol. This is because there is a possibility that a variable display of a special symbol will be performed. In other words, immediately after shifting from the high base state to the low base state, there is a possibility that the benefits of the high base state (variable display of the second special symbol, which is more advantageous than the first special symbol), although it is in the low base state, may be received. This is because it is different from the pure low base state (normal state). As a result, the number image 77a (variation display number) displayed in the variation number display area 77 does not relate to the variation display of the special symbol in the high base state, but the variation display of the special symbol in the pure low base state. It becomes possible to clarify that it is related to.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display screen 71a of the lower image display device 71 occupying the center of the game board 2 (game area 3) and the display screen 72a of the upper image display device 72 located above the display screen 71a. An effect symbol display area is provided straddling both of the above, and the effect symbol 8 is variablely displayed (variable effect) in the display area. In addition to this, a variation number display area 77 is provided in the upper right portion of the display screen 72a away from the center of the game board 2 (game area 3), and the number image 77a is displayed (display of the variation display number) in the display area. ) Is to be performed. This makes it possible to display the number of times image 77a (variation display number of times) so as not to interfere with the effect display related to the variation effect.

In particular, in this embodiment, the variation number display area 77, the fourth symbol display area 78, and the small effect symbol display area 8b are above the uppermost end of the outer guide piece 4a provided on the surface of the transparent game board (in particular, That is, it is provided on the outside of the game area 3 (see FIG. 50). Therefore, for example, the game ball flowing down the game area 3 does not hinder the visual recognition of the number image 77a (variation display number) in the variation number display area 77. This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the variation number display area 77 and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper image display device 72 is arranged so that the upper part of the display screen 72a is tilted toward the front side, and the portion (protruding portion) of the display screen 72a protruding upward from the upper end of the transparent game board. ) Is provided with a variation number display area 77 and the like (see FIGS. 50 and 52). Since the variation number display area 77 and the like provided in this protruding portion faces the forehead of the player (the seated player) who plays the game with the pachinko gaming machine 1, it should be seen by the player. For example, it is possible to grasp (confirm) the number of fluctuation display times and the like with a small movement of the line of sight while the fluctuation display of the special symbol is being performed (during the execution of the fluctuation effect). In particular, since the game board (transparent plate) does not exist on the front side of the upper part of the display screen 72a provided with the variation number display area 77 and the like, the visibility of the upper part of the display screen 72a is the game board (transparent). It is possible to maintain good visibility without being hindered by the plate).

Further, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display screen size is smaller than that of the lower image display device 71, and the lower image display device 71 as the main display device can be positioned as a sub display device. The image display device 72 is provided with a variation number display area 77. As a result, it is said. It is possible to clearly indicate the number of fluctuation display times by distinguishing it from the main effect display (variation effect) performed centering on the lower image display device 71.

Further, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, an image (composite image) composed of a plurality of (four in this example) layer layers can be displayed on the image display device, and is arranged at the highest level (front side) among them. The special figure reserved image and the number of times image 77a are displayed by the layer L4, and the display / non-display of the layer L4 is switched. As a result, the number-of-times image 77a (variable display number of times) of the layer L4 can be displayed separately from the images of the other layers L1 to L3 (secondary symbol image, background image, main symbol image, etc.), and the number-of-times image 77a can be displayed. It is possible to easily switch the display / non-display of (variable display count). In particular, in this embodiment, since the special figure reserved image and the number of times image 77a are on the same layer, the special figure reserved image and the number of times displayed on different image display devices such as the lower image display device 71 and the upper image display device 72. It is possible to hide or switch the display of the image 77a (all at once) at the same timing. This makes it possible to simplify the process (control) when the number of times image 77a and the information image related to other game situations are hidden or displayed at the same time, and the switching can be performed smoothly. It becomes.

In the above-described embodiment, the variable display count display area 77 is provided on the display screen 72a (display area) of one of the two image display devices (upper image display device 72), each of which is a liquid crystal display. Although the number image 77a (variation display number) is to be displayed in the number display area 77, the configuration related to the display of the variation display number is not limited to this. Hereinafter, other aspects relating to the display configuration of the variable display number will be illustrated. In the following, the description of the configuration, the action and effect, etc. common to the examples will be omitted, and the points different from the examples will be mainly described.

[Other Aspect 1]
In the above-described embodiment, both of the two image display devices are liquid crystal displays, but among them, the lower image display device 71 that mainly displays the variable display and the stop display (variable effect) of the effect symbol 8 is a liquid crystal display. Other displays such as a drum display, a 7-segment display, a dot matrix display, and the like may be used. In this case, the display located on the upper side of the display is an image display device (upper image display device 72) including the same liquid crystal display as in the above-described embodiment, in the upper area of the display screen of the display device. The variable display number display area 77 (number image), the small effect symbol display area 8b (small effect symbol 8a), and the fourth symbol display area 78 (special figure 1 fourth symbol 78a, special figure 2 fourth symbol 78b) are displayed. It is possible.

According to such another aspect 1, the display of the variation effect by the lower display device (lower display means) composed of a display device other than the liquid crystal display and the variation effect (effect image) by the upper image display device composed of the liquid crystal display. ) Can be combined (coordinated with) with the display of), and the number image 77a, the small effect symbol 8a, and the fourth symbol can be displayed above the effect. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to exert an effect such as being able to clearly show the number of variations of the identification information in an easy-to-understand manner, in distinction from the main effect display (variation effect).

[Other aspect 2]
In the above-described embodiment, two image display devices are provided side by side on the back side of the game board 2 (transparent game board), but one display device consisting of a liquid crystal display or the like is provided on the back side of the game board and also. A small display (liquid crystal display, 7-segment display, dot matrix display, etc.) is provided at a predetermined portion of the center decoration that surrounds the front side of the display surface (display area) of the display device, and the small display is provided. The device may display the number of fluctuations of the identification information. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), a small liquid crystal display is displayed in the upper center of the center decoration body 10 surrounding the display screen 71a (display area) of the first image display device 71 composed of a liquid crystal display. A second image display device 720 composed of a device is provided, and a variable display number display area, a small effect symbol display area, and a fourth symbol display area are provided on the display screen 720a, and the number image 77a and the small effect symbol 8a are provided in each of these display areas. , Special figure 1 fourth symbol 78a, special figure 2 fourth symbol 78b shall be displayed. In FIG. 54 (a), the same reference numerals as those in the above-described embodiment are omitted or the same reference numerals are given.

Even in such a configuration according to the other aspect 2, the number of fluctuations of the identification information can be shown in an easy-to-understand manner in the second image display device 720, in distinction from the main effect display (variation effect) in the first image display device 71. It is possible to obtain the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment. Even in the configuration according to the other aspect 2, good visibility can be obtained by arranging the second image display device 720 with its upper end tilted toward the front side. Further, the place where the second image display device 720 (second display means) is provided is not limited to the upper center of the center decoration body 10, but is near the stage portion 11 of the center decoration body 10 (lower part of the center decoration body 10). Of course, it can be provided in other places such as the left side portion and the right side portion of the center decoration body 10.

[Other Aspect 3]
In the above-described embodiment, the variation number display area 77 is provided in the upper portion of the display screen 72a of the upper image display device 72, and the variation number display area 77 is the outside guide piece 4a (outer rail) provided on the game board 2. ) Is located above (that is, outside the game area 3), but the position where the variation number display area (number display unit) is provided (the position where the variation display number of the identification information is displayed) is the game area 3. Other positions outside of are also possible. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the position A which is the outer side of the game area 3 and is the lower right part of the game board 2, the position B which is also the lower left part, and the upper right part. It is possible to provide a number display (number display unit) for displaying the number of fluctuations of the identification information at the position C or the like. That is, it is possible to provide the number-of-times display (number-of-times display unit) at a position visible through the viewing window 51a of the front frame 51 on the outside of the game area 3. In FIG. 54 (b), the same reference numerals as those in the above-described embodiment are omitted or the same reference numerals are given.

Even in the configuration according to the other aspect 3, there is no concern that the game ball flowing down the game area 3 obstructs the visual recognition of the number display (variation display number), so that the number display (variation display number) can be used. It is possible to improve the visibility. The number-of-times display in this configuration may be a liquid crystal display, a 7-segment display, a dot matrix display, etc., regardless of the type, but considering the installation space (size), cost, etc., the 7-segment display or the like can be used. It is desirable to use a display other than a liquid crystal display such as a dot matrix display.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, regarding the control by the payout control board 110 (payout control microcomputer 116), a plurality of processes having substantially different control cycles are performed based on one timer interrupt, or the payout motor 121 is driven. Although the configuration for adjusting the current is illustrated, such control can be applied to other than the payout control. Hereinafter, other aspects relating to their control will be illustrated. In the following, the description of the configuration, the action and effect, etc. common to the examples will be omitted, and the points different from the examples will be mainly described.

[Other Aspect 4]
In the above-described embodiment, the current value of the drive current is adjusted for the payout motor 121, but the stepping motor for driving the frame movable decorative member 13 (directing movable body 13b, emblem accessory 13s) shown in FIG. 49. The drive current value may be adjusted under the control of the sub-control board 90 (effect control microcomputer 91). Specifically, when the frame movable effect of rotating the emblem accessory 13s for a predetermined time is executed with the effect movable body 13b appearing (see FIG. 49B), the effect control microcomputer 91 is the emblem accessory. When the drive of the emblem motor (not shown) that rotates 13s is started, the energization of the motor is started with the drive current of 100%, and the output of the pulse signal that rotates (drives) the emblem motor is started (S5501,). See S5601). Here, in the above-described embodiment, the timing of the start of rotation (drive) is different from the start of energization of the payout motor 121, but in this embodiment, the timing of the start of energization and the start of rotation (drive) are the same. Then, a signal (for example, 30% down) for reducing the current value of the drive current of the emblem motor based on the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) from the start of rotation of the emblem motor (start of rotation of the emblem accessory 13s) (for example, 30% down). (Current control signal) is output to continue the rotational drive of the emblem motor. After that, a signal (current control signal) that raises the current value of the drive current of the emblem motor to 100% is output and the emblem motor is output in accordance with the rotation stop timing of the emblem accessory 13s predetermined by the movable effect pattern. The output of the pulse signal that rotates (drives) the emblem motor is stopped, and the rotation (drive) of the emblem motor is stopped (see S5711 and S5712).

According to such another aspect 4, it is possible to reduce the load applied to the emblem motor and suppress the temperature rise of the emblem motor. Further, it is possible to reliably stop the rotation of the emblem accessory 13s at a predetermined stop position. In the above-described embodiment, as the movable effect performed under the control of the sub control unit, an effect using the board movable decorative member 14 (14L, 14C, 14R) (board movable effect) is also provided, so that the board is movable. It is also possible to adjust and control the drive current value for an electric drive source such as a stepping motor that operates the decorative member 14.

[Other Aspect 5]
In the above-described embodiment, the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) configured by the full-color LED is provided (see FIG. 1). The frame lamp 66 (frame LED) may be controlled to adjust the drive current value under the control of the sub control board 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control). For example, when the frame light emission effect is continuously performed in a predetermined light emission mode (light emission effect pattern) from the start to the end of the big hit game, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the frame LED when the frame LED emits light (starts to drive). Starts the output of the LED drive signal that starts energization to 100% drive current (see S5501). Here, in the above-described embodiment, the timing of the drive start is different from that of the start of energization of the payout motor 121, but in this embodiment, the timing of the start of energization and the start of drive are the same. Then, a signal (current control signal) that lowers (for example, 20% down) the current value of the drive current of the frame LED is transmitted based on the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the start of driving (for example, the start of light emission) of the frame LED. Output and continue driving the frame LED. After that, a signal (current control signal) for increasing the current value of the drive current of the frame LED to 100% or decreasing the current value again is output according to the timing predetermined by the light emission effect pattern. Therefore, an effect of changing the light emitting mode (brightness and darkness) of the frame LED is performed.

According to such another aspect 5, it is possible to reduce the load on the frame LED (LED drive board) and suppress the temperature rise of the frame LED while not impairing the effect of the frame LED. It becomes. It is also possible to adjust and control the drive current value not only for the frame LED but also for the panel LED (panel lamp 5).

[Other Aspect 6]
In the above-described embodiment, in the sub-control main process (see FIG. 39), the two control cycles (interrupt cycles) of the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) are different. Was there. Instead of these two timer interrupt processes, one 1 ms timer interrupt process is provided, and in the 1 ms timer interrupt process, the 1 ms timer interrupt process is subordinated according to the payout control main process (see FIG. 57) of the above-described embodiment. It may be configured to be executed in the control main process. In this case, in the 1 ms timer interrupt process in the sub-control main process, the first counter update process and the second counter update process are performed. For example, when the value of the first counter becomes "2", FIG. 41 and the like. When the processing content (S4201 to S4204) by the 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009) shown in FIG. 42 is executed and the value of the second counter becomes "10", the 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) shown in FIG. It may be configured to execute the processing contents (S4301 to S4305) by.

According to such another aspect 6, the process related to the 2 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 41 and the like and the process related to the 2 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 41 and the like are triggered by one timer interrupt (1 ms timer interrupt) by the effect control microcomputer 91 and shown in FIG. 42 and the like. It is possible to execute the processing related to the 10ms timer interrupt processing. This makes it possible to facilitate program design even in sub-control, and it is possible to easily respond to design changes, specification changes, and the like. In particular, with regard to the electrical parts for the production of the sub-control system, the mode of the movable production using the movable decorative member (movable accessory) often differs greatly depending on the model, so that the electric parts used accordingly are also diverse. Prone. For this reason, for example, depending on the electrical components for production used in the new model, appropriate production control (drive control) may be difficult with the existing control processing, but appropriate production control (drive) may be performed by adjusting the control cycle. If control) can be obtained, by using the counter update process in the one 1 ms timer interrupt process by the effect control microcomputer 91 as in this embodiment, by adding or deleting processes having different control cycles. It will be possible to respond easily. Specifically, for example, three drive motors A, a drive motor A for the movable decorative member A, a drive motor B for the movable decorative member B, and a drive motor C for the movable decorative member C are provided, and control of each drive motor is provided. When the cycle is "drive motor A: 2 ms", "drive motor B: 3 ms", "drive motor C: 4 ms", the three counter update processes corresponding to each control cycle are converted to 1 ms timer interrupt process. It is possible to provide and configure each motor drive control according to the count value (count value updated in 1 ms cycle) by each counter update process.

Further, for example, when it is desired to improve the processing speed related to the effect display, the receive command analysis process (S4302) performed in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is extracted, and the 1 ms timer by the effect control microcomputer 91 is extracted. A counter update process for measuring the execution timing of the received command analysis process may be provided in the interrupt process, and the received command analysis process may be executed based on the count value of the counter update process. By doing so, it is possible to improve the processing speed related to the effect display. As described above, a configuration that can execute a plurality of processes having substantially different control cycles triggered by one timer interrupt (1 ms timer interrupt) can be said to be useful when applied to control by the sub-control unit. It should be noted that the configuration can be applied not only to the payout control unit and the sub control unit but also to the control by other control units such as the main control unit and the image control unit.

Although examples and other embodiments have been described above as embodiments of the present invention, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the wording of each claim shall be used as long as it does not deviate from the scope described in each claim. It is possible, without limitation, to the extent that a person skilled in the art can easily replace them, and to appropriately add improvements based on the knowledge normally possessed by those skilled in the art.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, as the payout device 120, a configuration in which the screw 123 is rotated by the drive of the payout motor 121 to pay out the game ball is exemplified, but the configuration of the payout device is not limited to this. do not have. For example, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine having a sprocket (rotating body) that rotates by driving a payout motor instead of a screw and having a payout device having a configuration in which a game ball is paid out by the rotation of the sprocket. Is.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the non-rotational energization period (non-rotational energization state) is set before the start of rotation of the payout motor (before the start of the payout operation), and the rotation (drive) of the payout motor is started after the elapse of the period. However, it is not always necessary to set the non-rotational energization period (non-rotational energization state) before the start of the payout operation.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, after the rotation of the payout motor is started, the current value of the drive current supplied to the payout motor is reduced based on the detection of the first (first) game ball (payout ball) by the payout sensor. However, the game ball detection that triggers the decrease in the current value does not have to be the first (first) detection, and may be, for example, the second detection. Further, the current value may be reduced based on the elapsed time from the start of rotation of the payout motor instead of detecting the game ball.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the battle effect and the battle fanning effect before the battle effect are provided as the variable effect in the high accuracy and high base state, and the fanning operation by the board movable decorative member 14C can be executed in the battle fanning effect. However, it is possible not to perform this fanning operation. Since this fanning operation is an effect operation of driving the board movable decorative member 14C from the beginning of the fluctuation effect, the power consumption (driving power amount) at the start of the fluctuation becomes excessive even if the drive amount is small. This is because it can be said that the effect is more remarkable when the fanning operation is not performed in terms of preventing the above. Then, in the configuration (specification) in which the fanning operation is not performed, the identification information (special symbol, effect symbol) follows the end of the jackpot game related to the V-passing scheduled jackpot (for example, 15R 5th jackpot) in the high accuracy and high base state. Even if the frame movable decorative member 13 is in the return operation (driving by the first drive mode) when the variable display is started, there is a possibility that the board movable decorative member 14 is further driven (operated) at that timing. Will not be. Therefore, in this case, even if the frame movable decorative member 13 is in the return operation, if the gaming state at that time is the high accuracy and high base state, the driving of the frame lamp 66 is not restricted (the restricted state is set). However, the drive of the frame lamp 66 can be restricted (the restricted state is set) when the state is other than the high accuracy and high base state. By doing so, the driving of the frame lamp 66 is restricted (the restricted state is set) only when the power consumption (driving electric energy) of the gaming machine (electrical parts) may become excessive. It is possible to avoid that the drive of the frame lamp 66 is restricted to the user (the restricted state is set to the user).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the frame lamp 66 (frame LED) is the electric component subject to the drive restriction in the restricted state among the plurality of electric components for the effect, but the drive restriction target is the frame lamp 66. It is not limited to (frame LED). For example, the drive restriction target may be the board lamp 5 in place of or in addition to the frame lamp 66 (frame LED), the effect button 63 may be the effect button 63 when the effect button 63 is movable, or a plurality of image displays. It is possible to use an image display device (secondary display device) having a relatively small display screen size among the devices. That is, the type of the electric component for the effect to be driven is not limited as long as it is unlikely to adversely affect the effect or the progress of the game even if the drive is restricted.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the variable display of the identification information (special symbol, effect symbol) is started, the restricted state is set when the frame movable decorative member 13 is in the return operation (drive restriction flag is set). However, as long as the frame movable decorative member 13 is performing the return operation, the restricted state may be set regardless of other gaming situations. In this way, the restricted state is always set during the return operation of the frame movable decorative member 13, so that the power consumption (driving power amount) of the gaming machine (electrical component) becomes excessive during the return operation of the frame movable decorative member 13. It becomes possible to prevent.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the gaming board 2 is a pachinko gaming machine 1 composed of a transparent plate (transparent gaming board), but the present invention is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine provided with a gaming board composed of veneer. It is possible to do.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with the frame movable decorative member 13 in the upper center of the front frame 51, but the present invention is also applied to the pachinko gaming machine not provided with the frame movable decorative member. Is possible.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the display means (number display unit) for displaying the number of fluctuations of the identification information is provided on the gaming board, but the frame body (front frame) constituting the front side of the gaming machine is provided. You may. Specifically, for example, a display means such as a liquid crystal display is displayed on the front surface (front side surface) or the bottom surface of the accommodating portion constituting the frame movable decorative member 13 provided in the upper center of the front frame 51 shown in FIG. May be provided and the display means may display the number of variable display times of the identification information. In this case, it is desirable to incline the upper portion of the display surface forward (front side) so that the displayed content can easily enter the player's field of view (field of view) as in the above-described embodiment. Further, display means such as a liquid crystal display are provided on the left and right sides of the front frame 51 (window edge of the viewing window 51a) shown in FIG. 1 and on the upper surface of the ball hitting plate (upper plate) 61 (near the first effect button 63a). , The display means may display the number of fluctuations of the identification information.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the variation effect pattern to be executed is a specific variation effect pattern such as including the SP reach effect, the number image (variation display number) is displayed or hidden during the execution of the variation effect. It was supposed to be. That is, the display / non-display of the variation display number is automatically switched based on the variation effect pattern. Alternatively or in addition to this, the display / non-display of the variable display number may be switched based on an external input by a player, a game hall clerk, or the like. For example, in a situation where the game is not being performed, such as during the execution of a demo effect, the display / non-display of the variable display number of the identification information can be switched by operating the effect button 63, a switch (not shown) on the sub control board 90, or the like. It can be possible. By doing so, it is possible to arbitrarily set the display / non-display of the variable display number of the identification information.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the display of the number of times image 77a (display of the number of times of variation display) is performed in the low base state, but it may be performed in the high base state as well. In this case, the display mode (position, size, color, typeface, etc.) of the number image 77a (variation number display area) is different between the low base state and the high base state, or a predetermined fluctuation number unit (position, size, color, typeface, etc.) is used in the high base state. For example, it is desirable to differentiate between "display of the number of variable display times in the low base state" and "display of the number of variable display times in the high base state", such as updating and displaying in units of 10 times). By doing so, it becomes possible to clearly distinguish and show the number of fluctuation display times of each game state.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, one of the two display devices (display means) is provided with a variation number display area 77 (number display unit) for displaying the variation display number (number image 77a) of the identification information. However, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine having three or more display devices and a gaming machine having one display device. In the latter case, for example, a variation number display area (area for displaying the number image) is located at the end of the display screen of one effect display device including a liquid crystal display that mainly performs variation display (variation effect) of the effect symbol 8. Can be provided. That is, one display means can be provided with an effect display unit and a number-of-times display unit. Further, the size (screen size) of the display screen of one liquid crystal display is set so that the upper part of the display screen protrudes upward from the upper end (upper side) of the game board as in the above-described embodiment. A variable number display area (a region for displaying a number image) may be provided in the protruding portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the variable effect image displayed on the image display device is a superposition (composite) of four layers (layers L1 to L4) (see FIG. 53), but the layer layer is used. The number of layers constituting the layer is not limited to this, and the position (arrangement order) of each layer constituting the layer layer is not limited to the above-described embodiment.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the special figure reserved image and the number-of-times image are displayed on the same layer (layer L4), but they may be displayed on different layers. In this case, it is possible to switch the display / non-display of the special figure reserved image and the display / non-display of the number of times image independently.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the small effect symbol and the fourth symbol are displayed on the same layer (layer L1), and the special figure reserved image and the number-of-times image are displayed on the same layer (layer L4). For example, it is possible to display the small effect symbol, the fourth symbol, and the count image on the same layer, or display all of the small effect symbol, the fourth symbol, and the special figure reserved image and the count image on the same layer. Is. That is, it is also possible to display any or all of the small effect symbol, the fourth symbol, and the special figure reserved image, and the number-of-times image on the same layer. In this case, the image on the same layer as the number-of-times image is displayed or hidden by switching the display / non-display of the number-of-times image.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) stored in the special figure reservation storage unit is read out for the preliminary determination (holding look-ahead) based on the start-in ball, and the read-out acquisition random number value (acquisition) is read. Information) was to be determined (preliminary determination) (“Starting ball entry processing (S205)”. See FIGS. 11, 13, etc.), but the predetermination method is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure hold storage unit, the main control unit or sub-control unit stores an area (acquisition information storage means) for storing acquisition information (that is, acquisition information acquired based on the start-in ball) to be determined in advance. It may be provided in the RAM of the unit and the acquired information stored in the storage area (predetermination storage unit) may be determined (preliminary determination). In this case, by storing the result of the preliminary determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub control unit, it is possible to erase the acquired information (acquired information stored in another storage area) used for the preliminary determination. Alternatively, instead of preliminarily determining the acquired information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit, the acquired information acquired based on the start-in ball may be preliminarily determined. That is, the acquired information may be determined in advance before being stored in the special figure reservation storage unit. In this case, it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the acquired information to be pre-determined separately from the special figure holding storage unit, and it is also necessary to read the acquired information stored in the special figure reserved storage unit for the pre-determination. do not have.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, it is assumed that the number of rounds of the jackpot game has two types of "2R" and "15R", but the number of rounds is not limited to this, and there are three types of rounds. The above may be used, or only one type may be used. Further, the opening patterns of the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35 (V attacker) are not limited to the above-described embodiment, and for example, the opening time and the number of opening times per round are various. It is possible to take the aspect of.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, depending on the length of the opening time of the second large winning opening 35 (V attacker) in the V round, the possibility of passing through V becomes high (easy) and low (substantially impossible). It was possible) and the case was set. That is, when the opening time of the second large winning opening 35 in the V round is relatively long, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second large winning opening 35, and the second large winning opening 35 becomes available. If at least one of the game balls that have entered passes through the specific area 39 with certainty, while the opening time of the second major winning opening 35 in the V round is relatively short, the second major winning is achieved. It is difficult (substantially impossible) for the game ball to enter the mouth 35, so that the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39. Instead of this, a movable piece that opens and closes a specific area is provided, and the movable piece is operated based on the number of balls entered into the second large winning opening 35 in the V round (counting value by the number of entered ball counting means). , V passability may be different depending on the operation mode.

For example, when the movable piece is operated based on the first predetermined number (for example, the first) of balls entering the second large winning opening 35 in the V round, the operation mode of the movable piece may pass through V. When the movable piece is operated based on the second predetermined number (for example, any of the second to the specified number) of balls, the movable piece of the movable piece is set to be low (substantially impossible). The operation mode is a mode in which the possibility of passing through V is high. Then, in the V round, a big hit in which the movable piece operates only in a mode in which the possibility of passing through V is low, that is, a big hit in which the movable piece operates only based on the first predetermined number of balls entering the second large winning opening 35. "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is defined as a jackpot that may operate in a mode with a low possibility of passing through V or in a mode with a high possibility of passing through V, that is, the first predetermined to the second winning opening 35. The jackpot in which the movable piece operates based on the number of hits and the second predetermined number of hits may be defined as the "V-passing scheduled jackpot". Even with such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the probability fluctuation function is activated (whether or not a high probability state is generated) based on whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific region, as in the above-described embodiment.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the player is given a game privilege that a high probability state is generated based on the fact that the game ball has passed the specific area 39 in the V round during the big hit game (during the special game). Although the above is exemplified, the privilege referred to in the present invention is not limited to the occurrence of a high probability state. For example, it gives some benefit to the player, such as a high base state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the starting port is high, and a fluctuation time shortening state (time reduction state) in which the fluctuation time of the identification information is shorter than usual. If so, the content (type) of the privilege does not matter. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area, one privilege may be given or a plurality of benefits may be given.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine (so-called “V probability machine”) having a specific region 39 as a probability variation operation port is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific area is included in the large winning opening. In a type of gaming machine (so-called "symbol probability change machine") that determines whether or not to give a high probability state based on the result of a special symbol hit / fail determination (type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed) without having 39. However, the present invention is applicable. Alternatively, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine of a type that does not have a probability fluctuation function. In addition, a specific area (V area) is provided in the large winning opening where the ball can be entered when the result of the special symbol winning / failing judgment is a small hit, and the gaming ball that entered the large winning opening during the small hit game It is also possible to apply the present invention to a type 1 and type 2 type pachinko gaming machine in which a big hit is obtained when passing through a specific area (passing through V) and a big hit game is executed based on the passing through the V.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the control process (so-called special figure 2) in which the second special symbol hold (variation display of the second special symbol) is preferentially digested over the first special symbol hold (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed. (Priority change) has been adopted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a control process (so-called special figure 1 priority change) in which the first special figure hold is preferentially digested over the second special figure hold. Alternatively, no priority is set for the digestion of the first special figure hold and the digestion of the second special figure hold, and the oldest memorized one of the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold is digested in order. It may be the control process of the control process (so-called ball entry order (memory order) fluctuation). Further, instead of the special figure 2 priority change in the above-described embodiment, the change display of the first special symbol and the change display of the second special symbol (digestion of the first special figure hold and digestion of the second special figure hold) are displayed. Control processing (so-called special figures 1 and 2 simultaneous fluctuations) executed in parallel may be adopted.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the jackpot probability can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by inactivating / operating the probability fluctuation function, but the type (number) of the jackpot probability is Is not limited to this, and for example, three or more types of probabilities can be set, such as a medium probability (third probability) higher than a low probability (first probability) and lower than a high probability (second probability). May be good. Further, the first low probability and the first high probability (first probability condition), the second low probability and the second high probability (second probability condition), the third low probability and the third high probability (third probability condition), etc. , Multiple types of probability conditions that define the relationship between low probability and high probability are provided, and any of the multiple types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selectable) when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, for example. May be good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the one to which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified, but after inserting the gaming coin as the gaming medium, a plurality of rotating cylinders (reel) based on a predetermined gaming start operation. Is rotated, the rotation of the plurality of slingshots is stopped based on a predetermined rotation stop operation, and a predetermined privilege is given based on the display mode of the symbol (identification information) indicated by the stopped slingshots. The present invention can also be applied to a possible spinning machine (slot machine).

[others]
Hereinafter, the inventions related to the embodiments (Examples) disclosed in the present specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference Invention 1)
Conventionally, a gaming machine is equipped with various electric components necessary for its operation. The electric component is usually provided on a frame (game machine frame), a game board, or the like that constitutes a game machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-11204). Most of the electrical parts installed in gaming machines are supplied by suppliers, and the specifications of the electrical parts used will be taken into consideration when developing and manufacturing gaming machines. For this reason, for example, when a new electric component with different specifications from the electric component used in the past is adopted due to a model change of a gaming machine, etc., the design of the program for controlling the electric component is changed or new. May require development.

However, since the design change and new development of the control program affect the operation of the gaming machine, it is desirable to minimize the change of the control content established in the past from the viewpoint of ensuring stable operation. However, if an attempt is made without changing the control content, there is a risk that the degree of freedom related to structural design such as component selection will decrease.

The present reference invention 1 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and the purpose thereof is to stabilize the operation related to the game without reducing the degree of freedom in design at the time of model change or the like. It is to provide a game machine.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
A gaming machine capable of playing a predetermined game,
Equipped with control means to control electrical components
The control means is
Based on one interrupt generated at a predetermined period, at least the first counter update process for updating the value of the first counter and the second counter update process for updating the value of the second counter can be executed. With
Every time the value of the first counter updated by the first counter update process becomes the first predetermined value, the first control process related to the specific electric component can be executed.
Each time the value of the second counter updated by the second counter update process becomes the second predetermined value, the second control process relating to the electric component other than the specific electric component can be executed. Is.

In such a game machine, a control means for controlling an electric component executes a first counter update process and a second counter update process based on one interrupt generated at a predetermined period, and the value of the first counter is set. Every time the first predetermined value is reached, the first control process related to the specific electric component is executed, and every time the value of the second counter becomes the second predetermined value, the second control process related to the electric component other than the specific electric component is executed. Since it is possible to execute the above, it is possible to separately perform the control according to the electric component with one interrupt as a trigger. This makes it possible to stabilize the operation of the gaming machine while ensuring the degree of freedom in design including the selection of electrical parts.

The "electrical components" refer to, for example, various motors, solenoids, LEDs, indicators, sensors, switches, control boards (control circuits), and other electrical components necessary for the operation of the gaming machine. "Specified electrical component" refers to any of those electrical components. Further, the counter update processing that can be executed based on one interrupt generated at a predetermined period is not only the first counter update processing and the second counter update processing, but also, for example, the third counter update processing and the fourth counter update processing. Etc., may include three or more counter update processes. In this case, counter update processing such as a third control process that can be executed based on the count value updated by the third counter update process and a fourth control process that can be executed based on the count value updated by the fourth counter update process. It is possible to configure the control process corresponding to the above in an executable manner. Further, the first predetermined value as the value of the first counter that triggers the execution of the first control process and the second predetermined value as the value of the second counter that triggers the execution of the second control process are different values. It does not matter whether they are present or have the same value. This also applies to the case where the third counter update process, the fourth counter update process, and the like are provided.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 described above.
The control means determines whether or not the value of the first counter is the first predetermined value before determining whether or not the value of the second counter is the second predetermined value. It is characterized by that.

In such a gaming machine, the value of the second counter updated by the second counter update process determines whether or not the value of the first counter updated by the first counter update process is the first predetermined value. Since the determination of whether or not the value is a predetermined value is performed before the determination, the first control process can be preferentially executed with respect to the second control process. This makes it possible to improve the accuracy of the control (first control process) related to the specific electric component.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 or Reference Invention 1-2 described above.
With the game board,
With a frame body to which the game board is mounted,
The specified electric component and the electric component other than the specified electric component are characterized in that they constitute a frame component provided on the frame body side.

In such a gaming machine, the specific electric parts and the electric parts other than the specific electric parts are the constituent parts (frame parts) on the frame body side on which the game board is mounted. This makes it possible to realize control (frame control) related to frame parts suitable for structural change (model change) of the frame body.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-3 described above.
Equipped with a payout means to pay out the game ball by driving an electric drive source,
The specific electric component is characterized in that it is the electric drive source.

In such a gaming machine, since the specific electric component is an electric drive source responsible for the payout operation of the game ball by the payout means, the control related to the payout operation of the game ball and the control related to other electric parts are performed. And can be processed separately. As a result, it becomes easy to obtain a stable operation for both the payout operation by the payout means and the other operations.

According to the above-mentioned reference invention 1, it is possible to stabilize the operation related to the game without lowering the degree of freedom in design at the time of model change or the like.

(Reference Invention 2)
The gaming machine is provided with a payout device (payout means) for paying out game balls as rental balls or prize balls. The payout device is generally configured to be able to pay out a game ball by driving a payout motor, a solenoid, or the like (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-347018).

In a gaming machine equipped with the above-mentioned payout device, for example, when a special game advantageous to the player is started due to the occurrence of a big hit or the like, a gaming ball to a predetermined entrance such as a big winning opening during the special game. A large number of prize balls will be paid out based on the entry of the ball. In this case, the payout device continuously performs the payout operation, but the continuous payout operation puts a load on the payout device, and there is a risk that the payout device may break down due to heat generated by the payout motor or the like. In this regard, in the technique described in Patent Document 1, the drive of the payout motor is temporarily stopped for each payout of the game ball to suppress the heat generation (temperature rise) of the payout motor. If the payout motor is repeatedly stopped and started every time it is paid out, the drive control of the payout motor becomes complicated.

The present reference invention 2 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to avoid complicated drive control of an electric drive source such as a payout motor, while avoiding complicated drive control of the electric drive source. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a temperature rise.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
It is a gaming machine equipped with a payout means for paying out a gaming ball by driving an electric drive source.
A supply means for supplying a drive current to the electric drive source,
A control means for controlling the electric drive source is provided.
The control means is
Based on the establishment of a predetermined operation start condition, the first drive control for starting the drive of the electric drive source with the electric drive source in the energized state, and
It is possible to execute a second drive control in which the current value of the drive current supplied to the electric drive source is reduced to continue driving the electric drive source at a predetermined time during the drive of the electric drive source. It is characterized by being.

In such a game machine, based on the establishment of the start condition of the payout operation, after the electric drive source is started to be driven with the electric drive source in the energized state, electricity is supplied at a predetermined time during the drive of the electric drive source. Since the electric drive source is continuously driven by reducing the current value of the drive current supplied to the target drive source, the electric drive source does not need to be temporarily stopped. It is possible to suppress the temperature rise of. This makes it possible to suppress the temperature rise of the electric drive source while avoiding the complicated drive control.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 described above.
A detection means capable of detecting a game ball paid out by the payout means is provided.
The control means is characterized in that, in the second drive control, the current value of the drive current is reduced based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means.

In such a gaming machine, the trigger for the second drive control, that is, the trigger for lowering the current value of the drive current is the detection of the paid out gaming ball, so that the certainty of the control can be improved. .. This makes it possible to realize stable drive control (payout operation).

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 described above.
The control means is characterized in that, after the operation start condition is satisfied, the current value of the drive current is reduced based on the detection of the first game ball by the detection means.

In such a gaming machine, the trigger for the second drive control (the trigger for lowering the current value of the drive current) is the detection of the first (first) gaming ball after the start of the payout operation, so that the certainty of control is achieved. It is possible to reduce the load on the electric drive source (payout means) from the early stage of the payout operation. This makes it possible to realize effective drive control (payout operation) for suppressing the temperature rise of the electric drive source.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 2-1 to Reference Invention 2-3 described above.
After the execution of the second drive control, the control means increases the current value of the drive current based on the establishment of a predetermined operation end condition, and keeps the electric drive source in the energized state, and the electric It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a third drive control for stopping the drive of the drive source.

In such a gaming machine, based on the establishment of the end condition (stop condition) of the payout operation, the electric drive source is maintained in the energized state while the current value of the drive current is increased, so that the electric drive source is connected. Since the drive is stopped, the payout operation can be reliably stopped. This enables accurate payout of the game ball.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 2-1 to Reference Invention 2-4 described above.
In the first drive control, the control means does not start driving the electric drive source until a predetermined time elapses after the electric drive source is energized, and the control means does not start driving the electric drive source based on the elapse of the predetermined time. It is characterized in that the drive of the electric drive source is started.

In such a gaming machine, when the electric drive source is started to be driven (the payout operation is started), the electric drive source is energized while the electric drive source is not started to be driven. It is possible to stably start the drive (payout operation) of the drive source. This makes it possible to smoothly start paying out the game ball.

According to the above-mentioned reference invention 2, it is possible to suppress the temperature rise of the electric drive source while avoiding the complicated drive control of the electric drive source such as the payout motor.

(Reference Invention 3)
Conventionally, the identification information (for example, a special symbol, an effect symbol, etc.) is variablely displayed, and the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result, so that a special game advantageous to the player can be executed. Gaming machines are widely known. In this type of gaming machine, various electrical parts such as movable bodies (gimmicks), LEDs, and speakers are provided on the frame (game machine frame) that constitutes the outer shell of the gaming machine and the gaming board that is placed inside the frame. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-195934), the electric components of the above are driven along with the execution of the effect to enhance the effect of the effect.

In a game machine equipped with a plurality of electric parts for directing as described above, it is possible that two or more electric parts are driven at the same time, but such driving at the same time causes the amount of driving power (power consumption). If the power consumption becomes excessive, the power supply unit (power supply board, etc.), drive source (motor, solenoid, etc.) and other devices of the game machine may be damaged or malfunction, and stable operation of the game machine cannot be guaranteed. In order to deal with this, it is conceivable to adopt a power supply unit with a larger capacity or to simplify the production, but in the former case, the product cost will be high, and in the latter case, the production effect will be achieved. Is not a good idea either.

The present reference invention 3 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to prevent the drive power amount (power consumption amount) from becoming excessive and to hinder the production and other games. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine capable of avoiding the above.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
It is a gaming machine that enables a special game that is advantageous to the player to be executed based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the specific display result.
A production execution means that can execute a production, and
With multiple electrical components that can be driven when performing the production,
A power supply means that supplies drive power to electrical components,
It is equipped with a drive control means that controls the drive of electrical components.
The drive control means is characterized in that when the drive state of an electric component is a specific situation, it is possible to set a restricted state in which the drive of a predetermined electric component is restricted among the plurality of electric components. Is.

In such a gaming machine, when the driving state of an electric component that can be driven when the effect is executed is a specific situation, a restricted state is set in which the driving of a predetermined electric component among a plurality of electric components is restricted. Is possible. Therefore, in a specific situation, by setting the restricted state, it is possible to suppress the amount of electric power (driving electric energy) consumed for driving the electric component. Further, in the restricted state, the drive of a predetermined electric component among a plurality of electric components is restricted, but by preventing the drive of all the plurality of electrical components from being restricted, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the effect of the effect. It will be possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the amount of electric power (driving electric power amount) consumed for driving the electric parts from becoming excessive, and to avoid interfering with the production and other games.

The "electrical components" include, for example, an image display capable of displaying an image, a movable body (movable member) that can be operated by an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, a light emitting body (light emitting member) such as an LED, and the like. It refers to various electrical game components that are driven by receiving power supply, such as speakers that output sound effects. Further, the "specific situation" is, for example, a situation in which two or more electric parts out of a plurality of electric parts may be driven at the same time, depending on the type and number of the electric parts, the driving mode, and the like. Refers to a situation in which the amount of drive power (power consumption) supplied to electrical parts may become excessive. Further, the "limitation" refers to suppressing the driving of the electric component, for example, by stopping the driving of the electric component, reducing the driving amount and the number of driving times, or reducing the driving speed.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 described above.
The drive control means is characterized in that the restricted state can be set when the specific situation is reached when the variable display of the identification information is started.

In such a gaming machine, it is possible to set a restricted state when the driving status of the electric component is a specific status when the variable display of the identification information is started. Therefore, when the variable display of the identification information is started under a specific situation, it is possible to prevent the driving power amount of the electric component from becoming excessive in the variable display. This makes it possible to prevent the variable display of the identification information and the accompanying effect from being hindered.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 described above.
When the restricted state is set, the drive control means is characterized in that the setting of the restricted state is released based on the end of the variable display of the identification information.

In such a gaming machine, if a restricted state is set assuming that the driving status of the electric component is a specific status when the variable display of the identification information is started, this restricted state is released by the end of the variable display. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to set the restricted state in one variable unit. This makes it possible to prevent the restricted state from being continuously set.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-3 described above.
The specific situation is characterized in that, among the plurality of electric components, a specific electric component different from the predetermined electric component is driven in a predetermined mode.

In such a gaming machine, a specific situation is such that a specific electric component other than a predetermined electric component among a plurality of electric components is driven in a predetermined mode. Therefore, in a situation where a specific electric component is driven in a predetermined mode, the drive of a predetermined electric component other than the specific electric component can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent a predetermined electric component from being driven at the same time in addition to the specific electric component driven in at least a predetermined mode, and it is possible to suppress the driving power amount of the electric component.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 described above.
The specific electric component is configured to include a specific movable portion that can operate in a predetermined operation mode and can take a first state before operation and a second state after operation.
The predetermined aspect is characterized in that it is a first driving mode in which the specific movable portion in the second state is set as the first state.

In such a gaming machine, a specific electric component can operate in a predetermined operation mode and can take a first state (initial state) before operation and a second state (operation state) after operation. It is composed of parts. Then, the driving mode (predetermined mode) of the specific electric component which is the above-mentioned specific situation is the first driving mode in which the specific movable portion in the second state (operating state) is set to the first state (initial state). It has become. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the drive power amount of the electric component from becoming excessive in the situation where the specific electric component is driven in the first drive mode in order to set the specific movable portion in the first state (initial state). Will be. This makes it possible to prevent the specific movable portion from interfering with the operation (return operation) of returning to the first state (initial state).

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 described above.
The drive control means can drive the specific electric component in the second drive mode in which the specific movable portion in the first state is set to the second state.
When the specific electric component is driven in the second drive mode when the special game is executed, the specific electric component can be driven in the first drive mode with the end of the special game. It is characterized by that.

In such a gaming machine, it is possible to drive a specific electric component in a second drive mode in which the specific movable portion in the first state (initial state) is set to the second state (operating state), which is special. When the game is executed, a specific electric component may be driven in the second driving mode. Then, in this case, it is possible to drive the specific electric component in the first driving mode with the end of the special game, that is, to return the specific movable portion to the first state (initial state). .. Therefore, with the end of the special game, the amount of driving power of the electric component becomes excessive in the situation where the specific electric component is driven in the first drive mode in order to set the specific movable portion in the first state (initial state). It is possible to prevent this. This makes it possible to prevent the specific movable portion from being hindered in the return operation of the first state (initial state) with the end of the special game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-6 described above.
The effect executing means can execute a predetermined end effect with the end of the special game.
After the end effect is completed, the variable display of the identification information can be started.
When the specific electric component is driven in the second drive mode when the special game is executed, the effect time related to the end effect associated with the end of the special game is shorter than the drive time according to the first drive mode. It is characterized by that.

In such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute a predetermined end effect with the end of the special game, and after the end effect is completed, it is possible to start variable display of the identification information. Then, when the specific electric component is driven in the second drive mode when the special game is executed (when the specific movable portion is set to the second state (operating state)), the effect related to the end effect associated with the end of the special game. The time (end effect time) is shorter than the drive time according to the first drive mode, that is, the return operation time related to the return operation in which the specific movable portion is in the first state (initial state). Therefore, when a specific electric component is driven in the first drive mode with the end of the special game, the end effect time elapses before the end of the drive and the end effect ends, so that the specific electric component is the first. The variable display of the identification information can be started under the condition of being driven in the driving mode, that is, under the condition where the return operation of the specific movable portion is performed. By setting the restricted state under such a situation, the amount of driving power of the electric component is suppressed, and the return operation of the specific movable part accompanying the end of the special game and the fluctuation of the identification information performed following the end of the special game are performed. It is possible to prevent the display and the accompanying production from being hindered.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-8 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-7 described above.
The restricted state is characterized in that the driving of a part of the predetermined electric component is restricted.

In such a gaming machine, when a restricted state is set, the driving of a part of a predetermined electric component among a plurality of electric components is restricted. Therefore, the drive of all predetermined electrical components is not limited. As a result, there are electric components whose drive is not restricted even in the restricted state, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect.

In addition, "the drive of a part of a predetermined electric component is restricted" means, for example, when the predetermined electric component is one electric component and the electric component performs a plurality of drives, the drive of the plurality of electric components is restricted. It corresponds to the limitation of driving one or more of them (excluding all of them). Further, when a predetermined electric component is a plurality of electric components, it is applicable that the driving of one or two or more (excluding all of the plurality) of the plurality of electric components is restricted. Further, when a predetermined electric component is a plurality of electric components and one of the electric components performs a plurality of drives, the drive of one or two or more (excluding all of the plurality) of the plurality of drives is limited. Applicable to be done.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-9 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-8 described above.
As the predetermined electric component, the first electric component and the second electric component are included.
The first electric component is configured to include a movable portion that can operate in a predetermined operation mode.
The second electric component is configured to include a light emitting unit capable of emitting light in a predetermined light emitting mode.
In the restricted state, the driving of the second electric component is restricted.

In such a gaming machine, as a predetermined electric component to be restricted from driving in a restricted state, a first electric component configured to include a movable part that can operate in a predetermined operation mode and a predetermined light emission mode. It has a second electric component configured to include a light emitting unit capable of emitting light. Then, in the restricted state, the driving of the second electric component is restricted. Therefore, in the restricted state, the driving of the second electric component (light emission of the light emitting portion) is restricted, but the driving of the first electric component (operation of the movable portion) is possible. This makes it possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-10 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-9 described above.
The second electric component is configured to include a plurality of light emitting parts.
In the restricted state, the light emission of a part of the plurality of light emitting units is restricted.

In such a gaming machine, the second electric component is configured to include a plurality of light emitting units, and in the restricted state, the light emission of a part of the plurality of light emitting units is restricted. .. Therefore, in the restricted state, all the light emission of the plurality of light emitting units constituting the second electric component is not restricted. As a result, there is a light emitting unit whose light emission (driving) is not limited even in the limited state, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect.

In addition, "the light emission of a part of a plurality of light emitting parts is restricted" corresponds to, for example, that the light emission of one or two or more (excluding all of the plurality of light emitting parts) of the plurality of light emitting parts is restricted. do. Further, the "limitation" here means, for example, not to make the light emitting part emit light (turn off), to reduce the brightness (light amount) of the light emitting part, to make the light emitting part of the light emitting part monotonous, and the like. Refers to suppressing the drive of (second electrical component).

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-11 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-7 described above.
As the predetermined electric component, the first electric component and the second electric component are included.
The first electric component is configured to include a movable portion that can operate in a predetermined operation mode.
The second electric component is configured to include a light emitting unit capable of emitting light in a predetermined light emitting mode.
In the restricted state, the drive of the second electric component is restricted, and the drive is restricted.
The drive control means does not set the restricted state when the first electric component is not driven in the specific situation, and when the first electric component can be driven in the specific situation. It is characterized in that the restricted state is set.

In such a gaming machine, as a predetermined electric component to be restricted from driving in a restricted state, a first electric component configured to include a movable part that can operate in a predetermined operation mode and a predetermined light emission mode. It has a second electric component including a light emitting unit capable of emitting light, and in a restricted state, the drive of the second electric component is restricted. Then, even in a specific situation, the restricted state is not set when the first electric component is not driven under that situation, and the restricted state is set when the first electric component can be driven. It is supposed to be. Therefore, the limited state is set (restricting the driving of the second electric component) only when the amount of driving power of the electric component may become excessive. This makes it possible to avoid setting the restricted state unnecessarily.

According to the above-mentioned reference invention 3, it is possible to prevent the driving power amount (power consumption amount) from becoming excessive and to avoid interfering with the production and other games.

(Reference Invention 4)
Further, the gaming machine of the reference invention 4-1 for solving the same problem as the above-mentioned reference invention 3 is
It is a gaming machine that enables a special game that is advantageous to the player to be executed based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the specific display result.
A production execution means that can execute a production, and
With multiple electrical components that can be driven when performing the production,
A power supply means that supplies drive power to electrical components,
Drive execution means for driving electrical components and
Equipped with a drive limiting means that can limit the drive of electrical components,
When a specific electric component among the plurality of electric components is driven in a predetermined mode, the drive limiting means drives a predetermined electric component other than the specific electric component among the plurality of electric components. It is characterized by being able to be restricted.

In such a game machine, when a specific electric component among a plurality of electric components that can be driven in performing an effect is driven in a predetermined mode, a predetermined electric component different from the specific electric component among the plurality of electric components is determined. It is possible to limit the drive of electrical components. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of electric power (driving electric energy) consumed for driving the electric component when the specific electric component is driven in a predetermined mode. In addition, by limiting the driving of predetermined electrical components other than specific electrical components among multiple electrical components and not limiting the driving of all of the plurality of electrical components, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the effect. It is possible to plan. As a result, it is possible to prevent the amount of electric power (driving electric power amount) consumed for driving the electric parts from becoming excessive, and to avoid interfering with the production and other games.

The "electrical components" include, for example, an image display capable of displaying an image, a movable body (movable member) that can be operated by an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, a light emitting body (light emitting member) such as an LED, and the like. It refers to various electrical game components that are driven by receiving power supply, such as speakers that output sound effects. Further, the "limitation" refers to suppressing the driving of the electric component, for example, by stopping the driving of the electric component, reducing the driving amount and the number of driving times, or reducing the driving speed.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 described above.
The drive limiting means is characterized in that it is possible to limit the driving of the predetermined electric component when the specific electric component is driven in the predetermined mode when the variable display of the identification information is started. It is something to do.

In such a gaming machine, when a specific electric component is driven in a predetermined mode when the variable display of the identification information is started, it is possible to limit the driving of the predetermined electric component. Therefore, when the variable display of the identification information is started under the condition that the specific electric component is driven in a predetermined mode, it is possible to prevent the driving power amount of the electric component from becoming excessive in the variable display. Will be. This makes it possible to prevent the variable display of the identification information and the accompanying effect from being hindered.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 described above.
The drive limiting means is characterized in that it is possible to limit the driving of the predetermined electric component until the variable display of the identification information is completed.

In such a gaming machine, when the variable display of the identification information is started and the specific electric component is driven in a predetermined mode, the driving of the predetermined electric component is restricted until the variable display ends. It is possible to limit the drive of the electrical components. Therefore, if the driving of a predetermined electric component is restricted when the variation display of the identification information is started, it is possible to prevent the drive power amount of the electrical component from becoming excessive at least until the variation display is completed. It will be possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the variation display and the accompanying effect from being hindered until the variation display of the identification information is completed.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Invention 4-1 to Reference Invention 4-3 described above.
The specific electric component is configured to include a specific movable portion that can operate in a predetermined operation mode and can take a first state before operation and a second state after operation.
The predetermined aspect is characterized in that it is a first driving mode in which the specific movable portion in the second state is set as the first state.

In such a gaming machine, a specific electric component can operate in a predetermined operation mode and can take a first state (initial state) before operation and a second state (operation state) after operation. It is composed of parts. Then, the specific movable portion in the second state (operating state) in which the driving mode (predetermined mode) of the specific electric component, which is a premise when the driving of the predetermined electric component is restricted, is defined as the first state (initial state). This is the first driving mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the drive power amount of the electric component from becoming excessive in the situation where the specific electric component is driven in the first drive mode in order to set the specific movable portion in the first state (initial state). Will be. This makes it possible to prevent the specific movable portion from interfering with the operation (return operation) of returning to the first state (initial state).

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 described above.
The drive executing means can drive the specific electric component in the second drive mode in which the specific movable portion in the first state is set to the second state.
When the specific electric component is driven in the second drive mode when the special game is executed, the specific electric component can be driven in the first drive mode with the end of the special game. It is characterized by that.

In such a gaming machine, it is possible to drive a specific electric component in a second drive mode in which the specific movable portion in the first state (initial state) is set to the second state (operating state), which is special. When the game is executed, a specific electric component may be driven in the second driving mode. Then, in this case, it is possible to drive the specific electric component in the first driving mode with the end of the special game, that is, to return the specific movable portion to the first state (initial state). .. Therefore, with the end of the special game, the amount of driving power of the electric component becomes excessive in the situation where the specific electric component is driven in the first drive mode in order to set the specific movable portion in the first state (initial state). It is possible to prevent this. This makes it possible to prevent the specific movable portion from being hindered in the return operation of the first state (initial state) with the end of the special game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-5 described above.
The effect executing means can execute a predetermined end effect with the end of the special game.
After the end effect is completed, the variable display of the identification information can be started.
When the specific electric component is driven in the second drive mode when the special game is executed, the effect time related to the end effect associated with the end of the special game is shorter than the drive time according to the first drive mode. It is characterized by that.

In such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute a predetermined end effect with the end of the special game, and after the end effect is completed, it is possible to start variable display of the identification information. Then, when the specific electric component is driven in the second drive mode when the special game is executed (when the specific movable portion is set to the second state (operating state)), the effect related to the end effect associated with the end of the special game. The time (end effect time) is shorter than the drive time according to the first drive mode, that is, the return operation time related to the return operation in which the specific movable portion is in the first state (initial state). Therefore, when a specific electric component is driven in the first drive mode with the end of the special game, the end effect time elapses before the end of the drive and the end effect ends, so that the specific electric component is the first. The variable display of the identification information can be started under the condition of being driven in the driving mode, that is, under the condition where the return operation of the specific movable portion is performed. Under such circumstances, by making it possible to limit the drive of a predetermined electric component, the amount of driving power of the electric component is suppressed, and the return operation of the specific movable part and the end of the special game are followed by the end of the special game. It is possible to prevent the variable display of the identification information and the accompanying production from being hindered.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-7 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 4-1 to 4-6 described above.
The drive limiting means is characterized in that it can limit the drive of a part of the predetermined electric component.

In such a gaming machine, it is possible to limit the drive of a part of a predetermined electric component when the drive of the predetermined electric component is restricted when the specific electric component is driven in a predetermined mode. .. Therefore, the drive of all predetermined electrical components is not limited. As a result, there are electric components whose drive is not restricted even in the restricted state, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect.

In addition, "restricting the drive of a part of a predetermined electric component" means, for example, when the predetermined electric component is one electric component and the electric component performs a plurality of drives, the drive is among the plurality of drives. It corresponds to the limitation of driving one or more (excluding all of them). Further, when a predetermined electric component is a plurality of electric components, it is applicable that the driving of one or two or more (excluding all of the plurality) of the plurality of electric components is restricted. Further, when a predetermined electric component is a plurality of electric components and one of the electric components performs a plurality of drives, the drive of one or two or more (excluding all of the plurality) of the plurality of drives is limited. Applicable to be done.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-8 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 4-1 to 4-7 described above.
As the predetermined electric component, the first electric component and the second electric component are included.
The first electric component is configured to include a movable portion that can operate in a predetermined operation mode.
The second electric component is configured to include a light emitting unit capable of emitting light in a predetermined light emitting mode.
The drive limiting means is characterized in that the drive of the second electric component can be restricted.

In such a gaming machine, as a predetermined electric component subject to drive restriction, a first electric component configured to include a movable portion that can operate in a predetermined operation mode, and light emission that can emit light in a predetermined light emission mode. It has a second electric component including a part. When limiting the drive of a predetermined electric component, it is possible to limit the drive of the second electric component. Therefore, although the drive of the second electric component (light emission of the light emitting portion) is limited, the drive of the first electric component (operation of the movable portion) is possible. This makes it possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-9 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-8 described above.
The second electric component is configured to include a plurality of light emitting parts.
The drive limiting means is characterized in that it can limit the light emission of a part of the plurality of light emitting units.

In such a gaming machine, the second electric component is configured to include a plurality of light emitting parts, and it is possible to limit the light emission of a part of the plurality of light emitting parts as a drive restriction target. It has become. Therefore, all the light emission of the plurality of light emitting units constituting the second electric component is not limited. As a result, even if the driving of the second electric component is restricted when the specific electric component is driven in a predetermined mode, there is a light emitting portion in which the light emission (driving) is not restricted, so that the effect of the effect is reduced. It becomes possible to suppress it.

In addition, "restricting the light emission of a part of a plurality of light emitting units" corresponds to, for example, limiting the light emission of one or two or more (excluding all of the plurality of light emitting units) of the plurality of light emitting units. Further, the "limitation" here means, for example, not to make the light emitting part emit light (turn off), to reduce the brightness (light amount) of the light emitting part, to make the light emitting part of the light emitting part monotonous, and the like. Refers to suppressing the drive of (second electrical component).

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-10 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 4-1 to 4-6 described above.
As the predetermined electric component, the first electric component and the second electric component are included.
The first electric component is configured to include a movable portion that can operate in a predetermined operation mode.
The second electric component is configured to include a light emitting unit capable of emitting light in a predetermined light emitting mode.
The drive limiting means does not limit the drive of the second electric component when the specific electric component is driven in the predetermined mode and the first electric component is not driven, and the specific electric component is used. It is characterized in that the drive of the second electric component is restricted when the component is driven in the predetermined mode and the first electric component can be driven.

In such a gaming machine, as a predetermined electric component subject to drive restriction, a first electric component configured to include a movable portion that can operate in a predetermined operation mode, and light emission that can emit light in a predetermined light emission mode. It has a second electric component including a part. Then, even when a specific electric component is driven in a predetermined mode, if the first electric component is not driven, the drive of the second electric component is not restricted, and the first electric component is driven. It is intended to limit the drive of the second electric component when it can be done. Therefore, the driving of the second electric component is limited only when there is a possibility that the driving power amount of the electric component becomes excessive due to the driving of the specific electric component and the first electric component. This makes it possible to avoid restricting the driving of the second electric component.

According to the above-mentioned reference invention 4, it is possible to prevent the driving power amount (power consumption amount) from becoming excessive and to avoid interfering with the production and other games.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 game board, 3 game area, 7b effect symbol display area (effect display unit), 8 effect symbol, 9a 1st effect hold, 9b 2nd effect hold, 9c 1st effect hold display area (1st effect display area) Direction hold display unit), 9d 2nd effect hold display area (2nd effect hold display area), 13 frame movable decoration member, 13a storage unit, 13b effect movable body, 13s emblem accessory, 14 board movable decoration member, 20th 1 starting port, 21 2nd starting port, 30 1st big winning opening, 35 2nd big winning opening, 41a 1st special symbol display (1st special symbol display), 41b 2nd special symbol display (2nd) Special symbol display unit), 61 hit ball supply plate (upper plate), 62 surplus ball saucer (lower plate), 62a lower plate full sensor, 71 lower image display device, 71a display screen, 72 upper image display device, 72a display screen, 77 Variable display count display area (count display unit), 77a count image, 80 main control board (main control unit), 81 game control microcomputer, 90 sub control board (sub control unit), 91 effect control microcomputer, 100 images Control board (image control unit), 101 image control microcomputer, 110 payout control board (payout control unit), 116 payout control microcomputer, 120 payout device, 121 payout motor (electric drive source, specific electrical component), 122 payout Sensor, 150 ball tank, 151 gutter member, 152 ball out sensor.

Claims (2)

It is a gaming machine equipped with a payout means for paying out a game ball by driving a payout motor .
A supply means for supplying a drive current to the payout motor ,
A control means for controlling the payout motor is provided.
The control means is
Based on the establishment of the payout operation start condition, the first drive control for starting the drive of the payout motor with the payout motor energized and
It is possible to execute a second drive control in which the current value of the drive current supplied to the payout motor is reduced to continue driving the payout motor at a predetermined time during the drive of the payout motor.
In the first drive control, at the start of the payout operation, the rotation of the rotary shaft is started after a non-rotational energization period in which the rotary shaft of the payout motor is not rotated while the payout motor is in the energized state.
A gaming machine characterized by that. After the execution of the second drive control, the control means increases the current value of the drive current based on the establishment of the end condition of the payout operation, and keeps the payout motor in the energized state of the rotary shaft. It is possible to execute the third drive control to stop the rotation,
In the third drive control, the payout motor is energized for a period longer than the non-rotational energization period.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.

Images